JP5643376B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention comprises variable display means composed of a plurality of variable display sections for deriving and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified, and the variable display means displays the derived information. The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of the identified identification information becomes a specific display result.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. When it is made, “big hit (specific game state)” occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop, swing, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In such a gaming machine, the step-up notice is repeatedly executed at each fluctuation in a pseudo continuous fluctuation (also referred to as a pseudo ream) in which one or more re-changes are performed during one change of identification information. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1). In addition, some gaming machines execute a reach effect in which specific identification information is stopped and developed into super reach when becoming super reach (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Application No. 2010-5283 Japanese Patent Application No. 2003-340033

  However, as in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, in a gaming machine that repeatedly executes a notice effect, if an effect that only needs to be executed once, such as a single announcement notice, or a flashy notice effect, There is a risk that the production becomes troublesome and the interest of the game is reduced. In addition, like the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned Patent Document 2, it may become redundant by suggesting that it will develop into super reach before becoming super reach, and depending on the situation of the game When it was decided that it would be super reach, it was a useless production.

  Therefore, the present invention provides a gaming machine that can prevent the presentation from becoming troublesome in a gaming machine that repeatedly executes a notice effect, and that can improve the interest of the game by eliminating useless effects. For the purpose.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of variable display units (for example, effects) for displaying and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types (for example, effect symbols) of identification information that can be identified. A variable display means (for example, an effect display device 9) comprising symbol display areas 9L, 9C, R) is provided, and the display result of the identification information derived and displayed on the variable display means is a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol: A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the combination of the stop symbols of the left, middle and right production symbols is a big hit combination) In this case, prior determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that determines whether or not to control to a specific gaming state before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed. Based on the determination result of the step S239) and the predetermining means, the display result of the identification information is displayed on the variable display means after the reach effect is executed after the identification information reaches the reach state in the variable display means. Reach effect execution means for deriving and displaying (for example, a portion for deriving and displaying the display result after the effect control microcomputer 100 executes reach effect based on the variation pattern with reach in the processing of steps S162 and S163), Based on the determination result of the pre-decision means, the notice effect execution means (for example, effect) that repeatedly executes the notice effect a predetermined number of times from when variable display of the identification information is started until the reach effect is executed by the reach effect execution means. Based on the determination result in step S701 by the control microcomputer 100, 48 (B) (C), FIG. 48 (F) (G), FIG. 48 (I) to (L), FIG. 49 (B) (C), FIG. 49 (E) (F) 49 (H)-(L), FIG. 52 (B) (C), FIG. 52 (F) (G), and FIG. 52 (J)-(L). ) And suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect before repeatedly executing the notice effect, and the reach effect execution means includes a first reach effect (for example, a reach effect of normal reach) and a second reach effect ( For example, it is possible to execute at least the reach of the super reach α and β, and to identify the non-specific display result (for example, reach lose pattern or discoloration) that is not the specific display result in the variable display means by executing the first reach effect. Temporarily stop the information and identify some of the variable display parts. After the variable display is restarted, the first development effect (for example, the development effect of “after temporary stop—1” or “break-off”) that executes the second reach effect, or the non-specific display result in the variable display means. Execution of the development effect that executes the second reach effect without temporarily stopping the identification information based on the specific display result (for example, the effect of making the reach reach without temporarily stopping the reach lose pattern or the spotted display). Means (for example, the part in which the production control microcomputer 100 executes the process of step S162 based on the determination result in the development effect setting process of step S554B). The development effect execution means is notified by the notice effect execution means. When the production is executed a specific number of times (for example, 3 times) or more , the second development production is executed without executing the first development production (for example, production system). The control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps S927 to S930 only when it is determined as N in step S925), and the suggestion effect execution means performs the suggestion effect according to any one of the plurality of effect modes. When the notice effect execution means repeats the notice effect, the special effect (for example, FIGS. 48 (D) (E), 48 (G) (H), FIG. 49 (D), FIG. 49 ( G), FIGS. 52 (E), (F), and FIGS. 52 (H) (I)), the notice effect is re-started, and the suggested effect is produced by one effect mode of a plurality of types of effect modes. The announcement effect is repeatedly executed at a different rate between when it is executed and when the suggestion effect is executed by another effect mode different from the one effect mode, and the variable display of the identification information is started and the reach effect executing means Reach by The special notice effect execution means for executing the special notice effect different from the notice effect only once (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the determination result in steps S702 to S704 to execute step S162). in the process of FIG. 48 (L), FIG. 49 (K) (L), and further comprising a portion) to perform special effect, such as shown in FIG. 52 (L). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming bothersome and execute a plurality of types of production while preventing a decrease in interest. Further, when it is determined that the second reach effect is to be executed, the first development effect is not executed, so that a useless effect can be omitted and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the development effect executing means has a higher rate when it is decided to control to the specific gaming state by the predetermining means than when it is decided not to control to the specific gaming state by the predetermining means. 44. For example, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 44, the first display effect is greater than the case where the variable display result is “losing” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The ratio determined to execute the development effect may be high). According to such a configuration, the player comes to pay attention to the development effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the development effect executing means, as the first development effect, the first stop appearance development effect (for example, the development effect of “temporary stop development-1”) and the first development effect. When it is determined that the second stop appearance development effect different from the stop appearance development effect (for example, the development effect of “ballet”) can be executed, and it is determined to be controlled to the specific gaming state by the predetermining means, The first stop event development effect is executed at a higher rate than the second stop event development effect (for example, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 44, if the variable display result is “big hit”, “ It is easier to determine a pattern of “separate eyes” than “development after temporary stop-1”. According to such a configuration, since the ratio of the specific display result varies depending on the effect mode of the first development effect, the player comes to pay more attention to the first development effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the variable display means is configured such that a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14). After the execution condition for variable display is satisfied, the start condition that allows the start of variable display is satisfied (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines No in step S231). On the basis of the fact that the variable display of information is started and the execution condition is satisfied, the storage unit for storing the right to perform the variable display up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, the first special figure storage unit and the second special figure) A hold storage unit, an effect control hold storage unit 195), and a determination unit (for example, an effect control microcomputer for determining whether the right to control to the specific game state is stored in the hold storage unit) The computer 100 further executes the processing of steps S621 to S623), and the notice effect execution means starts from the start of variable display of the identification information until the reach effect is executed by the reach effect execution means. A notice effect is executed based on the determination result of the prior determination means for the variable display (for example, FIGS. 48 (A) to (K), FIGS. 49 (A) to (J), FIGS. 52 (A) to (L)). The special notice effect execution means executes the special notice effect based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result in step S624). In the process of step S162, a pre-reading notice effect may be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming annoying due to repeated execution of a special notice effect that predicts whether or not the right to control to the specific gaming state is stored in the hold storage means. Decline can be prevented.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the special notice effect executing means executes the special notice effect only when it is determined by the prior decision means to control to the specific gaming state (for example, for effect control) The microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a jackpot confirmation notification effect in the process of step S162 based on the determination result in step S823. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming bothersome due to repeated execution of the special advance notice that informs that it is controlled to the specific gaming state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the special notice effect executing means executes a special notice effect using a loud sound and / or light with high illuminance as compared with the notice effect (for example, effect) Based on the determination result in step S823, the control microcomputer 100 turns on the frame LED 28 and the like with the brightest (illuminance) light in the process of step S162, and outputs the maximum volume sound by the speaker 27. May be configured). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming bothersome due to repeated execution of a special announcement effect using a loud sound and / or light with high illuminance, and to prevent a decrease in interest.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the notice effect executing means is a notice effect for operating the movable member below a predetermined range from a predetermined initial position (for example, “only beat” or “first mode”). The special notice effect execution means executes a special notice effect that causes the movable member to operate more than a predetermined range from the initial position (for example, a “movable object notice effect of the“ second mode ”). (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the movable object notice production in the process of step S162 based on the determination result in step S643). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming troublesome because the movable member is not moved back to the initial position after operating the predetermined range or more, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a continuous production type determination table. It is a figure which shows the list of a continuous effect pattern and a notice effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a continuous production pattern determination table and a notice production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the repetition presence determination table and the suggestion effect mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an appearance timing determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific pattern determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific pattern determination process at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern common range. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command process at the time of a start winning prize. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect control holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a final stop symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production | presentation setting process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a big hit decision alerting | reporting effect setting process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a prefetch notice effect setting process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a movable object notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an expansion production | presentation determination process. It is a figure which shows a development production | presentation determination table. It is a figure which shows a non-uniformity determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of effect design change end. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation of a continuous production (pseudo-continuous). It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of a continuous production (notice series). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the mode of the suggestion effect at the time of a notice series. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the aspect of suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of a continuous production (slide pseudo | simulation series). It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the aspect of the suggestion effect at the time of a slip pseudo-ream. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of a movable object notice effect. It is a timing chart which shows the appearance timing of the character in suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the development pattern to super reach in a notice series. It is explanatory drawing which shows the development pattern to super reach in a notice series. It is explanatory drawing which shows the development pattern to the super reach in a slip pseudo-ream. It is explanatory drawing which shows the development pattern to the super reach in a slip pseudo-ream. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of a fluctuation pattern common range. It is a schematic exploded perspective view which shows the structure of a shutter unit. (A) is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38H and the left guide member, and (b) is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38L and the left guide member. (A) is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38H and the right guide member, and (b) is an enlarged vertical sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38L and the right guide member. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the shutters 38H and 38L are located at the retracted position, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state where the shutters 38H and 38L are located at the front surface position. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of the movable object notice effect of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of the movable object notice effect of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of the movable object notice effect of a modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The square display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) , A state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established in the order in which the start prizes are generated regardless of the prizes in the first start prize slot 13 and the second start prize slot 14. The variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to one of winning in the winning opening 13 and winning in the second start winning opening 14. For example, when giving priority to winning in the first start winning opening 13, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed. For example, even when the second reserved memory number is not zero, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed until the first reserved memory number becomes zero.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is performed. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) is performed. There is provided a second decorative symbol display 9b. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display. .

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display 9a are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display 9b. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the big-hit on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. That is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the starting memory or the starting prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, an area for displaying the total number (total number of reserved storage) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (hereinafter, the total reserved memory display unit 18c). Is provided). Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the 1st special symbol holding | maintenance memory | storage display 18a and the 2nd special symbol holding | maintenance memory | storage display 18b are provided, the total reservation memory | storage display part 18c does not necessarily need to be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided in the effect display device 9, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and In response to the start of one of the special figure games using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 8b, the variable display of the effect symbols is started. The period from the start of variable display of effect symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the finalized design symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means that the effect symbols that have not been stopped and displayed when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination continue to fluctuate. Display state, or a display state in which all or a part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (eg, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R, etc.) The remaining effect symbol display area (for example, “medium” effect) that has not yet been stopped when the ornament symbol (for example, the ornament symbol indicating the alphanumeric character of “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display area 9C, etc.), the effect symbol is a big hit in all or part of the display state in which the effect symbol is fluctuating, or in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R of “left”, “middle”, “right” This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or change the display mode of the background image, play and display a moving image that is different from the production symbol, or change the variation mode of the production symbol, so that the production operation different from before reaching the reach state is executed May be. Such an effect operation such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the change mode of the effect pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the effect display device 9 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 27, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the LED 25 and the frame LED 28, etc. before reaching the reach state. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach forms such as a normal reach for executing a “normal” reach effect, a super reach α for executing a “reach effect α”, and a super reach β for executing a “reach effect β” are set in advance. ing. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (big hit reliability) Becomes higher.

  In addition, there is a case where the effect during reach is executed in the variable display that becomes super reach. In this embodiment, the advance notice during the reach and the development effect can be executed as the effect during reach. The advance notice during reach is an effect for giving a notice that the game will become super reach by displaying a predetermined character image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 at a predetermined timing during variable display for super reach. In the development effect, after the variable display is started and the normal reach reach effect is executed, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and then all the effect symbol display areas 9L. , 9C, 9R is an effect that makes it appear as if it has evolved from normal reach to super reach by changing the effect symbol again (pseudo-continuous change) and executing the reach effect of super reach. In this embodiment, a plurality of patterns (learning advance notice patterns) are prepared as reach notices. In addition, a plurality of patterns are prepared as development effects. An effect other than these may be executed as an effect during reach.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, there is provided a movable member 33 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates. In this embodiment, the movable member 33 operates when a pseudo-continuous effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. In addition, in the decorative part around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter also referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. ) 34 is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 34 operates when a notice effect is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display 9a. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when it is informed that it is a probable big hit or a probable promotion effect (a special effect indicating promotion to a probable state), the gaming state is shifted to a high probability state. At the same time, the game ball is controlled to be in a high base state that is controlled so as to make it easier for the game ball to start and win (that is, the execution conditions for variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established). Transition. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the high base state is also shifted. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. (In other words, the digestion of the stored memory becomes faster), and as a result, it is easier to start a winning and the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a power supply board (not shown in FIG. 2). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 9a and the second decorative symbol display device 9b that variably display the decorative symbol, and the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 33 via the output port 106. The effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the movable member 34 via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  A variable display (during variation) effect different from the reach effect in this embodiment will be described.

  In this embodiment, during the variable display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, the variable display state of the production symbol may become a reach state, and the variable display result may be “big hit” There is a case where a variable display effect for informing the player of the fact that there is a variable display mode of the effect symbol is executed. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “continuous effect” and “slip” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 31 side. Or not is determined.

  In the variable display effect of “continuous effect”, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, variable display of the effect symbol is started and then variable display A predetermined effect operation is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 to 4 times) until a definitive effect symbol as a result is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, three types of continuous effects (“pseudo trains”, “notice trains”, and “slide pseudo trains”) with different effect modes can be executed. In this embodiment, before the continuous effect is repeated, a predetermined suggestive effect that suggests that the continuous effect is repeated is executed. There are a case where a continuous effect is executed after the suggestion effect is executed and a case where a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is executed without repeating the continuous effect after the suggestion effect is executed. As the suggestion effect, a different suggestion effect is executed depending on the type of the continuous effect. Moreover, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of effect modes are provided as the effect modes of the suggestive effect, and the ratio of the notice effect being executed after the execution of the suggestive effect is different depending on the effect modes. Moreover, in this embodiment, the appearance timing of the suggestion effect is not constant, and the ratio at which the notice effect is executed after execution of the suggestion effect varies depending on the appearance timing of the suggestion effect.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” continuous production, the variable display result is displayed after the variable display of the production symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being established once. Until the finalized effect symbols are derived and displayed, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. In the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo-continuous change). As an example, in the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, a special combination of simulations as shown in FIG. An effect symbol that is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as the consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this way, in the “simulated ream” continuous effect, it is suggested that the pseudo ream chance chances GC1 to GC8 are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 4A or the like is an effect symbol that is temporarily displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R. In the temporary stop display, while the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display or changing the effect symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the produced design symbol is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the effect symbol may be re-fluctuated after the effect symbol is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed is confirmed. In the continuous production of “pseudo-continuous”, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed once to three times, so that the first display condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, and the variable display of the production symbol It can be seen as if it were started 2-4 times in a row.

  In the “preliminary ream” continuous production, after the production of a pre-announcement effect (for example, step-up operation or character display) described later, the production display device 9 is blacked out (darkly turned), etc. Interrupt. Then, after the blackout of the effect display device 9 is finished, the notice effect is executed again from the beginning. Such a production operation is repeated a predetermined number of times. In this way, in the continuous production of the “notice continuation”, it is suggested that the production display device 9 is blacked out (specifically, the production that the glass breaks after the blackout is performed: see FIG. 49, etc.). It becomes directing. Note that while the “preliminary run” is continuously produced, the variation of the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R is continuously performed. In the “Preliminary Ream” continuous production, the notice production is restarted from one to three times from the beginning, so that the first presentation condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, as if the two notice productions were made. Can appear to have started ~ 4 times.

  In the variable display effect of “slip pseudo-ream”, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then “left” and “right” After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9R, etc., one effect symbol display area (for example, the “right” effect symbol display area 9R) is temporarily displayed. The effect display for repeating the effect operation for changing the effect symbol again is performed a predetermined number of times. That is, the “right” effect symbol display area 9R repeats the effect operation “temporary stop display → slip → revariation” a predetermined number of times. Thus, in the “slip pseudo-ream” continuous effect, the effect effect that the effect symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area 9 </ b> R slips and changes again becomes an suggestion effect. The effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R are not the effect symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “8” that are normally used, but “A”, “B”, “C”, etc. It is also possible to use a special symbol indicating the English character or a special symbol indicating hiragana such as “A”, “I”, “U”. Then, every time the “slip pseudo-ream” is repeated, “A” → “B” → “C” may be established so that the number of repetitions can be grasped by the design. That the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the effect operation of “temporary stop display → slip → revariation” once to three times in the “slip pseudo-ream” continuous effect. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the effect symbol has been started 2 to 4 times continuously.

  The variable display effect of “continuous effect” may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of repetitions increases. By performing the suggestion effect, the player can grasp the “continuous effect” and the number of repetitions, and the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” as the number of repetitions increases. It is done. Depending on the number of repetitions, the direction of the suggestion effect (for example, the pattern displayed in the “pseudo-run” or “slide pseudo-run”, the method of interrupting the notice effect in the “notice ream”) is changed, The player may be able to recognize the number of repetitions. Further, when the next is the last repetition, the suggestion effect of a specific effect mode may be executed so that the player can recognize that the next repetition is the last repetition.

  When the “continuous effect” variable display effect is executed, an effect such as a related display effect may be executed as the effect including the first time is repeated. As an example, one of the plurality of decorative LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the continuous production of “pseudo-continuous” is one. It may be controlled to increase gradually. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled. As another example, the movable member 34 provided inside or outside the game area may be controlled to operate during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation) by the continuous production of “pseudo-continuous”. . As yet another example, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation) by the “simulated ream” continuous effect. Also good. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-change effects, the lighting or blinking of the decorative LED, the operation of the movable member 34, and the display of the effect image The re-variation effect may be executed by combining some or all of them. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. When the production mode changes in, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” or the “15R probability variable big hit” may be increased. By executing such an effect, the player can be made to recognize the number of repetitions, and the player's expectation can be enhanced.

  The effect operation executed as such an effect may include any effect operation such as sound output from the speaker 27 and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9. In addition, for example, output of sound or sound effect by the speaker 27, difference in motion of the production target object (for example, the movable member 34, etc.) (difference in operating speed, difference in operating distance, difference in operating direction, etc.), presentation display Depending on the movement of the character image displayed on the device 9 (difference in movement speed, difference in movement distance, difference in movement direction, etc.) Alternatively, the character display may be changed or the display of the background image may be changed to change the effect mode in the re-change effect. Further, apart from the effect executed during the change of the effect symbol, when performing the suggestion effect such as a temporary stop of the effect symbol that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, for example, voice output from the speaker 27 or game The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped and displayed by an arbitrary production operation such as the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9.

  In the “slip” variable display effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then two or more effect symbol display areas are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or (2)) effect symbol display area (for example, “left” effect symbol display area 9L and / or “right” effect symbol display area 9R or both), the effect symbol is changed again and then stopped. Thus, the effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped is performed.

  In addition to “continuous production” and “slip”, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, and “Slip after chance chance stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of variable display of the effect symbol until the definite effect symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed. In all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the effect symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the variable display state of the effect symbols is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the production symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state, and after the reach state, the variable display result becomes “big hit” , The player's expectation is enhanced. In addition, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity eyes”, after the variable display of the effect symbols is started, all in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” An effect display is performed in which an effect symbol of a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol. In the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the variable display effect of the effect display is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started until the definite effect result that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R in all of the false combination chances GC1-GC8 lose combination combination (special combination) temporarily stop temporarily After the display, unlike the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, an effect display that changes the effect symbol to be stopped by changing the effect symbol again in a part of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. Is done.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “continuous effects” or “slip”, during the variable display of effect symbols, such as displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images, etc. Notifying the player that there is a possibility that the variable display state of the production symbol will reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol A notice effect may be executed. The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display state of the effect symbol after the effect symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. May be executed (started) before the reach state is reached (before the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R). In addition, the notice effect that informs that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include an effect that is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “character notice” and “operation notice” are set to be executable. An effect operation that becomes a notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the notice effect of “Character notice”, effect display for displaying a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed during variable display of the effect symbol. Here, as the display of the character image, a character image that is separate from the effect design may be displayed statically or displayed in action (animation display), or a character image that is variably displayed integrally with the effect design. The operation display (animation display) may be performed in a display form different from the variable display of the effect symbols.

  In the notice effect of “operation notice”, for example, when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation or a rotation operation) on the operation unit 30 during the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, the effect display device 9 By changing the display of the effect image on the display screen, or changing the sound output from the speaker 27, the effect operation is changed. As an example, in the notice effect of “notice at the time of operation”, a predetermined effect operation serving as a button operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of the effect symbol. In the button operation promotion effect, for example, an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, thereby prompting the player to operate the operation unit 30. Any production operation may be used. The effect operation that prompts the player to operate the operation unit 30 is not limited to the effect display device 9 that displays the effect image, and the player 27 outputs a predetermined sound, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration. One that lights or blinks the LED for a predetermined lighting pattern, one that operates the movable member 34 provided in the effect accessory provided inside or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, or one of these It may be a combination. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, an operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation of the operation unit 30 by the player is set. And if operation of the operation part 30 by the player is detected by the operation detection switch 31 within the operation effective period, the execution of the button operation promotion effect is stopped at the timing when the operation is detected, for example, prepared in advance. The effect display device 9 is caused to display any effect image of the plurality of types of effect images, and the sound effect corresponding to any one of the plurality of types of sound patterns prepared in advance is output from the speaker 27. Various production operations such as output are performed.

  As the notice effect by the effect operation different from the variable display operation of such effect symbols, various effect operations such as “step-up action” are executed in addition to “character notice” and “operation notice”. Here, in the notice effect of “step-up operation”, as an example, a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order on the display screen of the effect display device 9 during variable display of the effect symbols. An effect operation may be performed such that the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages by the effect display. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched. Further, as another example of the notice effect of “step-up operation”, there are a plurality of types of movable members 34 provided in the effect accessory provided inside or outside the game area during the variable display of the effect symbol according to a predetermined order. There may be a production operation in which the production mode is changed (stepped up) in a plurality of stages by the production operation performed in the above operation mode. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after the movable member 34 performs the effect operation in one kind of operation mode, the effect operation in the notice effect is terminated without being switched to the effect operation of the second stage. There may be. As described above, the notice effect of the “step-up operation” is executed in response to one start prize (that one game ball has entered the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening). This is a kind of notice effect that is executed during variable display of symbols and effects. In particular, it is a step-up notice effect in which the notice mode (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) changes (steps up) in multiple stages. . In general, the greater the number of changes (number of steps), the higher the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”). Further, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode at each step, it becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a specific reach effect is executed, “15R non-probable variation” Of the promotion from “big hit” to “15R probable big hit”, at least one of them may be notified in advance. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In addition to the “character notice”, “operation notice”, and “step-up action”, a movable object notice effect for operating the movable member 34 is executed. The movable object notice effect is a notice effect that causes the movable member 34 to operate in a predetermined effect manner during variable display of the effect symbol.

  Further, in this embodiment, apart from the above-mentioned notice effect, the look-ahead storage is pre-read, and the pre-read notice effect for notifying that there is hold data whose variable display result is “big hit” in the hold memory. May be executed. The effect operation that becomes the pre-reading notice effect may be executed (started) at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the effect symbol. For example, in the pre-reading notice effect, for example, by displaying a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the hold data whose variable display result is “big hit” in the hold memory. An effect display is made to notify that there is a certain event. Here, as the display of the character image, the character image may be displayed statically or displayed as an action (animation display). Further, the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to displaying the effect image on the effect display device 9, and the predetermined effect sound is output from the speaker 27, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are lit in a predetermined lighting pattern. Alternatively, it may be one that blinks, one that operates the movable member 34 provided in the effect accessory provided inside or outside the game area in a predetermined operation mode, or a combination thereof.

  Also, during the variable display when the special figure display result is "big hit", the big hit confirmation that notifies in advance that the special figure display result will be "big hit" before the special figure display result becomes "big hit" A notification effect may be executed. The jackpot finalizing notification effect is, for example, that the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined lighting mode at a timing before the display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol is derived, thereby notifying that it is a “hit”. Production. The jackpot confirmation notification effect is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 by displaying a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the effect symbol, changing the display mode of the background image, May be used to reproduce and display different moving images, or to change the variation of the effect design. Further, not only the display operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the effect display device 9 but also an audio output operation by the speaker 27 may be included. In addition, since it will be decided that it will be "hit" when the big hit confirmation notification effect is executed, it is desirable to make it a big effect. For example, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on with the brightest (illuminance) light, and the loudspeaker 27 outputs the sound of the maximum volume. The big hit confirmation notification effect may be a notification in advance that the special figure display result will be a “big hit” when there is a right to become a “big hit” in the hold memory.

  In this embodiment, when continuous effects such as “pseudo-continuous”, “notice-ream”, and “slide pseudo-ream” are executed, the “character notice” and “step-up action” notice effects are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, the movable object notice effect, the pre-read notice effect, and the jackpot confirmation notification effect are executed only once after the variable display of the effect symbol is started until the display result is derived and displayed. An effect that is executed only once from the start of variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed, such as a movable object notice effect, a pre-read notice effect, and a jackpot confirmation notification effect is also called a special notice effect. .

  The special notice effect is a notice effect in which the presence / absence of the execution and the effect mode are determined by processing different from the notice effect of “character notice”, “operation notice”, and “step-up action”. For example, the presence / absence of execution and the appearance mode are determined using a random number value different from the advance notice effect of “character notice”, “operation advance notice”, and “step-up action”. In the “character advance notice”, “operation advance notice”, and “step-up action” notice effects that are repeatedly executed, an effect mode that appears only when a predetermined number of repetitions is reached (for example, “step-up action”) The predetermined stage is not included in the special notice effect.

  When the performance is executed, it is determined that the game will be a “big hit”, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on with the brightest (illuminance) light, and the speaker 27 outputs the maximum volume sound. Since the big hit confirmation notification effect is executed only once, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming bothersome and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  The pre-reading notice effect that predicts that there is hold data whose variable display result is “big hit” in the hold memory is executed only once, thereby preventing the effect from becoming bothersome and reducing the interest. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the movable object notice effect for operating the movable member 34 is executed only once, the movable member 34 does not return to the predetermined initial position, and the movable member is subsequently used for the effect executed by the effect display device 9 or the like. 75 is overlapped, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming bothersome and prevent a decrease in interest.

  These special notice effects are executed at the last repetition of the continuous effects when the continuous effects are executed. By doing so, the special notice effect becomes easy to understand and the interest of the game is improved. Note that the special notice effect is not limited to the one that is executed in the last repetition of the continuous effect. The repetition may be executed only once.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, after the variable display of the production symbol is started, the variable display state of the production symbol does not become the reach state, but the predetermined design. There are cases where the finalized design that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreachless loss”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable symbol display state has reached the reach state after the variable symbol symbol display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a definite effect symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as reach lose combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. Note that the confirmed effect symbol that is a non-reach combination and the confirmed effect symbol that is a reach combination are collectively referred to as a confirmed effect symbol of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for designating the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b. The command 81XXH is an effect that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second change start commands and the change pattern designation command are prepared as separate effect control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating variable display results such as special symbols and effect symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (B), the prior determination result of whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT data is set corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the variable display mode (big hit type) of the effect symbol in the case of “big hit” is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” Is done. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the fluctuation pattern shown by the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command and the variable display result shown by the variable display result notification command can be specified by one production | presentation control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is an effect symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state, and the command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the probability change state, The command 9502H may be a third gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the short time state.

  In this embodiment, an effect symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of effect symbols. In contrast, the transmission of the effect symbol stop command may not be performed. In this case, on the side of the production control board 80, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed in response to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 31. You can make it.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. With the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening or the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, the number of executions of rounds (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state, or the big winning in the 2 round big hit state or the variable winning operation Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the mouth is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, a continuous effect operation may be executed from the start time of the small hit game state or from the start of variable display of the effect symbols to the end time of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Or, in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, depending on whether it is a period in which the big prize opening is in an open state or a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state, different performance operations May be executed.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. . In addition, when controlled to the two round big hit state and / or small hit game state, some or all of the hit start designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, and the winning end designation command are all or part of Instead of being transmitted, the effect operation in the two round big hit state and / or the small hit game state may be executed by the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command.

  The command B1XXH is a special figure using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first start prize opening (start prize) has been detected by the first start switch 13a. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the game is satisfied. In this embodiment, the first start opening winning designation command notifies the determination result using the predetermined determination numerical value at the time of the first start winning that is the time of detecting the game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening. Also used as a control command. For example, as shown in FIG. 5 (C), in the first start opening winning designation command, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates the variable display result as “big hit” or “small hit”. Whether or not it matches the determined value, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type matches the “non-probable change” and “probable change” corresponding to the 15-round big hit state, Or, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type indicates the variation pattern of the production symbol regardless of the reserved memory number (special diagram reserved memory number) of the special game, and the non-reach variation pattern (for example, the variable display result is Whether or not it is within the common range of non-reach variation patterns, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display pattern variable display mode is “non-reach” in “losing”, whether or not the super-reach variation pattern (for example, variable) Different EXT data is set depending on whether or not the display result is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern (the variation result with super reach and “lost”). More specifically, the command B100H is a first winning determination result notification command for notifying that it is within the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range. Command B101H is a second winning determination result notification command for notifying that the value is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. The command B102H is a third winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” corresponding to the 15-round big hit state. It is. The command B103H is a fourth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” or that the variable display result is “small hit”. The command B104H is a fifth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is not “winning” and is not within the non-reach variation pattern common range or the super reach variation pattern common range.

  The command B2XXH is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered (started winning) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, and the second special symbol display 8b This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the two special figures is established. In this embodiment, the second start opening winning designation command notifies the determination result using the predetermined determination numerical value at the time of the second start winning that is at the time of detecting the game ball that has passed the second start winning opening. Also used as a control command. For example, as shown in FIG. 5 (C), in the second start opening winning designation command, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Whether the numerical value data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 matches the “non-probability change” and “probability change” corresponding to the 15-round big hit state, Or the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is the non-reach variation pattern (for example, the variable display result) Is a non-reach variation pattern common range, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display pattern is “unreachable” and the variable display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach”. Depending on whether the super reach variation pattern common range display result is a variation pattern with super reach the "loss"), different EXT data is set. More specifically, the command B200H is a sixth winning determination result notification command for notifying that it is within the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range. Command B201H is a seventh winning determination result notification command for notifying that the value is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. The command B202H is an eighth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” corresponding to 15 rounds of big hit status. It is. The command B203H is a ninth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” or that the variable display result is “small hit”. The command B204H is a tenth winning determination result notification command for notifying that the variable display result is not “winning” and is not within the non-reach variation pattern common range or the super reach variation pattern common range.

  The command C0XXH displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the effect display device 9 and the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the hold memory number notification command, for example, the total number of hold data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit and the hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit, or the start data storage unit Different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of stored start data (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 80, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total storage number of the hold data in the hold storage unit and the second special figure hold storage unit can be specified.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 31 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the main board 31 side, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 503 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 56 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 503, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, to update various numerical data by software, so that a part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. The numerical data shown may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated by the random number circuit 503 independently of the CPU 56, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 56 as a random counter. It may be updated by software using Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated. The random number circuit 503 may be built in the game control microcomputer 560, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 560.

  The game control microcomputer 560 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type determines the big hit type, which is the variable display mode of the effect design when the variable display result is “big hit”, as one of “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type of the effect symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, a range of “1” to “251” is used. Takes the value of The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used for determining the variation pattern of the effect design to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “997”. Take. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 10 is “per-normal” or “unusual”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 15 based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally open state). Is used to determine whether or not to change to a state in which a game ball can easily enter (expanded open state).

  FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern of the effect symbol in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. When the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit” Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-5 are prepared in advance as non-reach fluctuation patterns. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. The hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” include the change pattern PA4-1, change pattern PA4-2, change pattern PB4-1, change A pattern PB4-2, a fluctuation pattern PA5-1, a fluctuation pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are the variation patterns. Are prepared in advance. Further, a fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and a fluctuation pattern PC1-5 are prepared in advance as hit fluctuation patterns corresponding only to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”.

  FIG. 8 shows the variation pattern type of the effect symbol in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 7 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. In other words, each variation pattern type only needs to be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, the rendering operation performed during variable display of the rendering symbol. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of the effect symbol does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns by the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, multiple variable patterns are classified (grouped) by the presence or absence of variable display effects of “continuous effects” and the number of re-variation executions (number of repetitions), and variable display effects of “continuous effects” are not executed. A variation pattern type including a variation pattern, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern in which the number of executions of re-variation (the number of repetitions) is 1 in the variable display effect of “continuous effect”, and a variable of “continuous effect” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count (repetition count) of re-variation execution 2 times or more is included in a display effect. As another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence / absence of a variable display effect such as “continuous effect” or “slip”, or the variable display time of the effect symbol. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 8, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are prepared in advance in response to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and “variable” variable display mode, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display result (big hit type) of “big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable pattern type CA 3-1 to the variable pattern type CA 3-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is prepared in advance. ing. Furthermore, the variation pattern type CA4-2 is prepared in advance only in the case where the variable display result is the “big hit” and “variable display type” (big hit type).

  The variation pattern type CA1-1 is a variation pattern type of “no shortening” in which the variable display time such as “continuous effect” and “slip” is not executed, and the variable display time of special symbols and effect symbols is not shortened. , A variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening” is included. For the variation pattern type CA1-2, for example, the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, or the time reduction control is performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the special symbol and the production symbol are variably displayed. It is a variation pattern type of “with shortening” in which variable display effects such as “continuous rendering” and “slip” are not executed because the time is shortened, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “with shortening”. The variation pattern type CA1-3 is a variation pattern type of “slide, continuous effect” in which a variable display effect of “continuous effect” or “slip” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It includes a variation pattern previously associated with “slip, continuous production”.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is when the reach effect is terminated with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state without the variable display effect of “continuous effect” being executed. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) continuous production” for deriving and displaying a definite production symbol of reach combination, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (losing) continuous production”. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, the number of executions of re-variation (the number of repetitions) in the variable display effect of “continuous effect” is 2, and the reach display is performed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed to the reach state. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) continuous production 2 times” that derives and displays a definite combination design of reach reach when is finished, and a variation pattern that is associated with “normal reach (losing) continuous production 2 times” in advance. Is included.

  In the variation pattern type CA2-3, the number of times of re-variation (the number of repetitions) in the variable display effect of “continuous effect” is one, and the reach display is performed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed to the reach state. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (losing) continuous production once” that derives and displays a definite effect design of reach combination when the operation is completed, and a variation pattern previously associated with “normal reach (losing) continuous production once” Is included. Fluctuation pattern types CA2-4 are accompanied by super reach (super reach α or super reach β) after setting the variable display state of the effect symbol to reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite effect symbol of the reach combination is derived and displayed. The variation pattern type of “Super Reach (Lose)” is included, and includes a variation pattern associated with “Super Reach (Lose)” in advance.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “continuous effect” is not executed, and the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed to the reach state, followed by the normal reach. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) continuous effect” for deriving and displaying a symbol, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no normal reach (big hit) continuous effect”. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, when the variable display effect of “continuous effect” is executed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state, followed by the normal reach, and when the reach effect ends, the definite effect symbol of the jackpot combination Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) continuous production” and includes a variation pattern associated with “normal reach (big hit) continuous production” in advance. Fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 is a “Super Reach (Big Bonus)” for deriving and displaying a definitive effect symbol of the big hit combination when the reach effect is completed, with super reach after setting the variable symbol display state of the effect symbol to the reach state. It is a variation pattern type, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “super reach (big hit)”.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “2nd release chance stop” that derives and displays a definite effect symbol that is one of the 2nd release chances TC1 to TC4, and “2nd release chance stop”. Are included in advance. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are variation patterns in which the finalized design symbol is one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4, and the variation pattern type CA4. −1. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprising”, the variation pattern type CA4-2 is derived from the variable display state of the effect symbol as the reach state and then the definite effect symbol of the reach combination is derived and displayed. It is a variation pattern type of “open reach reach loss”, and includes a variation pattern that is associated in advance with “2 times open reach loss”. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern PC1-4 and the variation pattern PC1-5 are variation patterns that use the confirmed effect symbol as a reach combination, and are included in the variation pattern type CA4-2. .

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 54 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31, and a variation pattern of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types is stored.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 54. The special symbol display result determination table 130 is determined to be a variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 8a or the special symbol game by the second special symbol indicator 8b. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state with "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state with "small hit" FIG. 11 is a table referred to for determination based on a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result.

  In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probabilistic state) (Determined value) is assigned to one of the special chart display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, it is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined with reference to the same special figure display result determination table 130.

  On the other hand, determination values are assigned to the special graphic display results corresponding to the special graphic game by the first special symbol display 8a and the special graphic game by the second special symbol display 8b. Different decision tables may be prepared. In this case, in the case of the special figure game by the first special symbol display 8a and the case of the special figure game by the second special symbol display 8b, the determined value is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. May be different. As an example, in the case of a special figure game by the second special symbol display 8b, the ratio determined as the special figure display result of “small hit” compared to the case of the special figure game by the first special symbol display 8a. As a result, a determination value may be assigned to each special figure display result.

  With such a setting, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the probability that the variable display result will be “small hit” is reduced compared to the special figure game using the first special figure. When the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening due to the high opening control in the short time state, the special figure display result is “small hit” and the little hit game state in which almost no prize ball is obtained. It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled, and to suppress the decline of the game entertainment due to the occurrence of a delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game on the second special symbol display unit 8b is executed in preference to the special symbol game on the first special symbol display unit 8a, the second special symbol display unit 8b in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency of the special game in the game will be increased, the time from the probability change state or short-time state (particularly the probability change state) to the 15th round big hit state will be shortened by such setting, and the game entertainment will be reduced. The effect that can be suppressed is great. Further, in the case of a special figure game by the second special symbol display 8b, a determined value may be assigned so that the special figure display result of “small hit” is not determined.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131 is variably displayed based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big jackpot” and control is made to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, depending on whether the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit is “1” or “2”, A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determination is assigned to a jackpot type such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a is executed, and the second special symbol indicator 8b sets the second special symbol indicator 8b. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable change” or “probability change” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15th round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the big round hit state. The table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not controlled to the probability change state, while being assigned to the jackpot type of “probability” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the determined value indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, the allocation of the determined value to each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the jackpot type of “probability change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “72” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned. When the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “73” to “100” is assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type, while the variation special figure designation buffer value is “ In the case of “2”, the decision value is not assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 10, the special figure display result is “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is satisfied. When it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, it is not determined to control to the two round big hit state with the big hit type as “surprise”. With such a setting, when the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening in the high opening control in the probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type becomes “surprise” and almost no prize ball is obtained. It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to a two-round big hit state, and to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game on the second special symbol display unit 8b is executed in preference to the special symbol game on the first special symbol display unit 8a, the second special symbol display unit 8b in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency at which the special game is executed is increased, such a setting has a great effect of suppressing the decline of the game entertainment. In addition to this setting, the special symbol game on the second special symbol display device 8b is executed in preference to the special symbol game on the first special symbol display device 8a, so that 15 rounds from the probability change state and the short time state can be obtained. The ratio of hitting big hits can be increased to improve the gaming fun.

  Even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, for example, a smaller decision value than that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. You may be made to do. Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state, if the big hit type is “surprise” and the game shifts to the probable change state after the end of the two round big hit state, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Thus, when the gaming state is the short-time state, even if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type determination table 131 is assigned so that the determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. The table data may be configured.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 11B, and FIG. The loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 11 and the loss change pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. 11D are prepared in advance.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprising change”. (Determined value) is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3, variation pattern type CA4-1, and variation pattern type CA4-2. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 differs. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, there is a portion in which the determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, while the variation pattern type CA4- No determination value is assigned to 1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1 to CA4-2. No decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to the “surprise”, the variation pattern type different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is determined. can do.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, all numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1. Here, a part of the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 in accordance with the case where the jackpot type is “surprise” in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. . As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a common variation pattern type in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and in the case where the special figure display result is “small hit”. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. Is set to

  When the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D are determined (predetermined) as the special figure display result to be “lost”, the variation pattern type is determined. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is a case where the variable display time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is not shortened, for example, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total reserved memory number is less than “3”. Selected as the table used. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is special when, for example, the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more even in the normal state. When the variable display time of a symbol or effect symbol is shortened, it is selected as a use table.

  Note that the variation pattern type is determined by referring to different determination tables when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short-time state and when the gaming state is a normal state and the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more. You may be made to be. Further, the variation pattern type may be determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether or not the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number other than “3” or not. Furthermore, when the total pending memory number is “0”, when the total pending memory number is “1”, when the total pending memory number is “2”, the total pending memory number is “3”. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to different determination tables when there is a certain number and when the total number of reserved memories is “4”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is less than “3”, the variation pattern type is determined with reference to a common determination table, while the total number of reserved memories is “3”. The change pattern type may be determined by referring to a different determination table when the total number of reserved memories is “4”. Alternatively, instead of the total number of reserved memories, the variation pattern type is determined by referring to a different determination table depending on whether the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are equal to or greater than a predetermined number. You may do it. In this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3”, etc.), the variation pattern type includes a variation pattern that has a shorter variable display time than when it is less than the predetermined number. It suffices that the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined to be higher. Alternatively, even when the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short time state, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and different determination tables are set according to the determination result. The change pattern type may be determined with reference to the reference. For example, if the total number of stored storages is less than a predetermined number in the probability variation state or the time reduction state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is selected as the use table, while the probability variation state or the time reduction state exists. Sometimes, if the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D may be selected as the use table.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is the variation pattern type CA1-. 1 to a variation pattern type CA1-3 and a variation pattern type CA2-1 to a variation pattern type CA2-4. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type is different. There is a part that. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, assignment of determination values to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation pattern type CA2-1 is different. . Thereby, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on whether or not the variable display time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, there are portions where determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 and the variation pattern type CA2-3, while the variation pattern type CA1-1 and the variation pattern A decision value is assigned to the type CA2-2. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern type CA2-2, while the variation pattern type CA1-2. Further, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-3. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether or not the variable display time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened.

  In this embodiment, when the special figure display result is “losing” and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories Regardless, the variation pattern type CA2-4 including a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is determined. That is, when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like is any one of “230” to “251”, at least super reach is involved regardless of the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories. The variable display of the effect design is executed.

  In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value for each variation pattern type depends on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. The assignment may be different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, the determined value is set to a different variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability variation state, or a short-time state. It may be assigned. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  In this embodiment, by referring to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to the variation pattern type CA1-3 and the variation The pattern type can be determined as any one of the pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It is. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern type based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type with reference to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, It can be determined whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state.

  The determination values assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 and the variation pattern type CA1-3 in the loss variation pattern type determination table (shortening) 132D are the variation patterns in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132C. It is larger than the determined value assigned to the type CA1-1 and the variation pattern type CA1-3. With such a setting, when the variable display time of the special symbol or effect symbol is shortened, it is determined that the variable symbol display state of the effect symbol is not set to the reach state at a higher rate than the case where it is not shortened. If the average variable display time in the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to be shorter than the average variable display time in the reach fluctuation pattern, the total reserved storage number is a predetermined number (specifically, “ 3 ") or more, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when it is less than the predetermined number, and when it is in the probabilistic state or the short time state, the total number of stored storages in the normal state As compared with the case where is less than a predetermined number (specifically, “3”), the average variable display time can be shortened.

  FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 133A shown in FIG. 12A and a hit variation pattern determination table 133B shown in FIG. 12B are prepared in advance as variation pattern determination tables.

  The loss variation pattern determination table 133A is based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type, etc., when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the special figure display result is “loss”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “lost”. Or, it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-3 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern PA1-3 is a variation pattern in which a variable display effect of “slip” is executed when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable pattern effect such as “slip” is executed by being determined by the variation pattern PA1-3. Can do. In the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, determination values are assigned to the variation patterns PA1-4 to PA1-5, respectively, corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type CA1-3. As shown in FIG. 7, the variation patterns PA1-4 to PA1-5 are re-variable in the variable display effect of “continuous effect” when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Is a variation pattern that executes (repeats) 1 to 2 times. With such a setting, even if the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, it is determined as one of the variation patterns PA1-4 to PA1-5, and the “continuous effect” A variable display effect can be executed.

  It should be noted that the ratio determined for the variation pattern for executing the variable display effect may be different depending on whether the variable display time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened. As an example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. 11 (D), a smaller determined value than the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132C shown in FIG. It may be assigned to the pattern types CA1-3. In the setting example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the special pattern variation time (variable display time of the special symbol) in the variation pattern PA1-1 in which the variable display effect such as “continuous effect” or “slip” is not executed is 12000 milliseconds [ ms], the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is set to 3000 milliseconds [ms]. On the other hand, the variation pattern PA1-4 for executing the variable display effect of “continuous effect” is 16000 milliseconds [ms] in the variation pattern PA1-3 for executing the variable display effect of “slip”. The special figure fluctuation time at is set to 24000 [ms]. That is, when the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the special pattern change time in the change pattern PA1-3 for executing the “slip” variable display effect and the change pattern for executing the variable display effect of “continuous effect” The special figure fluctuation time in PA1-4 is longer than the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern in which these variable display effects are not executed.

  For example, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “3”) or more, there is a variation pattern for executing variable display effects such as “slip” and “continuous effect” compared to a case where the total number is less than the predetermined number. A determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for the included variation pattern types CA1-3 is low. As a result, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Further, for example, in the case of the probability change state or the short time state, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-3 is larger than that in the normal state when the total number of reserved memories is less than a predetermined number (for example, “3”). A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so as to be lower. As a result, the average variable display time can be shortened when the probability change state or the time reduction state is set, compared to when the total number of reserved storage is less than the predetermined number in the normal state.

  When the hit variation pattern determination table 133B is determined (pre-determined) as the special figure display result to be “big hit” or “small hit”, the fluctuation pattern determination random number is determined according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR4. In the winning variation pattern determination table 133B, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Are assigned to one or a plurality of variation patterns (per variation pattern).

  Variation patterns PA3-1, PA3-2, PA5-1, and PA5-2 shown in FIG. 7 are variation patterns in which a continuous effect is executed three times. As shown in FIG. 7, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA5-1 are continuously produced during the period from the start of the variation to the time t1, and the super reach α is performed during the period from the time t1 to t3 (65 seconds). It is a fluctuation pattern in which the reach production is executed. In the variation patterns PA3-2 and PA5-2, the continuous effect is executed in the period from the start of the variation to the time t2 (> t1), and the super reach β is performed in the period from the time t2 to t4 (85 seconds). It is a variation pattern in which reach production is executed. In the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, it is easier to determine the variation pattern PA3-1 than the variation pattern PA3-2. In the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 133B, it is easier to determine the variation pattern PA5-1 than the variation pattern PA5-2. That is, when the number of executions of the continuous effect is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (here, 3 times), it is easy to determine a variation pattern in which the effect time of the continuous effect is short. In the variation pattern in which the effect time of the continuous effect is short, the effect time of the continuous effect per time is shortened. By doing in this way, when there are many repetitions of a continuous production, since the continuous production per time tends to become short, it becomes possible to prevent the production from becoming bothersome and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  The RAM 55 included in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 80, the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect type, the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern, and the randomness for determining the big hit confirmation notification effect. Numeric data indicating a numerical value SR3, a random value SR4 for determining the pre-reading notice effect, a random value SR5 for determining the moving object notice effect, a random value SR7 for determining the suggestive effect mode, and a random value SR8 for determining the appearance timing are: It is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. For example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the final stop symbol used for determining a final effect symbol (final stop symbol) that is a variable display result of the effect symbol may be controlled to be countable.

  The effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 503, such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit, to update various numerical data by software, thereby obtaining random number values SR1 to SR8. The numerical data shown may be counted. Alternatively, by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503, numerical data indicating all or part of the rendering random number is updated. You may make it do. When the random number circuit 503 is not mounted on the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 may count numerical data indicating all of the effect random numbers using a random counter.

  The random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect type is a random value used for determining whether the type of the continuous effect is “pseudo-continuous”, “notice-ream”, or “slide pseudo-ream”. ”To“ 99 ”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern is a random value used for determining which of the effect modes (continuous effect pattern) of the continuous effect, and is a value in the range of “1” to “100”. Take.

  The random value SR3 for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot notification notification effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot determination notification effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number SR4 for determining whether to perform the pre-reading notice effect is a random value used for determining whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random value SR5 for determining the moving object notice effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the movable object notice effect and which effect mode (movable object notice effect pattern) is to be used. Yes, and takes values in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number SR6 for determining whether or not to repeat is a random value used to determine whether or not to repeatedly perform the notice effect after the suggestion effect is executed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “10”. In this embodiment, the notice effect is usually executed after the suggestion effect (the effect suggesting that the notice effect is executed), but the suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined rate. In order to prevent the notice effect from being executed, whether or not the notice effect is to be executed after the suggestion effect is executed using the random number SR6 for determining whether or not to repeat and the repeat existence determination table shown in FIGS. (Presence / absence of repetition of the notice effect) is determined, and if it is determined that the notice effect is not executed after the suggestion effect (no repeat), control is performed so that the notice effect is not repeatedly executed even if the suggestion effect is executed.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern of the continuous effect (twice) is determined (for example, the change pattern PA1-5, PB2-2, PB4-2, etc.), the effect control CPU 101 determines that it is repeatedly present. Will perform the notice effect after performing the first suggestion effect, and will also perform the notice effect after executing the second suggestion effect, then "non-reach lose", "normal reach lose" An effect control pattern that shifts to an effect such as “Super reach big hit” is selected. On the other hand, when the variation pattern (for example, variation patterns PA1-5, PB2-2, PB4-2, etc.) of continuous effects (twice) is determined, if the effect control CPU 101 determines that there is no repetition, 1 After the second suggestion effect is executed, the notice effect is executed, and after the second suggestion effect is executed, the notice effect is executed even though the third suggestion effect is executed. An effect control pattern that shifts to effects such as “non-reach lose”, “normal reach lose”, “super reach lose”, “super reach hit” is selected. As described above, when it is determined that there is no repetition, the number of suggestion effects according to the number of repetitions of the notice effect determined by the variation pattern (for example, if the number of repeats of the notice effect is two, the number of suggestion effects is also twice. ) Is executed one more time than ()), and control is performed so that the notice effect is not executed thereafter. One suggestion effect is executed in a period immediately before the end of the notice effect to be executed last.

  The random value SR7 for suggestion effect mode determination is a random value used for determining which effect mode (suggestion effect pattern) of the suggestion effect, and a value in the range of “1” to “100”. Take.

  The random number SR8 for determining the appearance timing is a random value used for determining which one of the appearance timing of the suggestion effect (including the execution timing of the predetermined effect during the suggestion effect) is “1” to It takes a value in the range of “100”.

  The random number SR9 for determining the development effect is the development effect (after the variable effect is started and the normal reach reach effect is executed, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. After that, by changing the effect symbols again in all or part of the effect symbol display area and executing the reach effect of super reach, it is an effect that makes it appear as if it developed from normal reach to super reach) It is a random value used to determine whether or not, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value SR10 for determining the break eyes is a random value used for determining which of the break eyes to be temporarily stopped in the development effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the presentation control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and controls.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the continuous effect type determination table 160 stored in the ROM. When the continuous production type determination table 160 executes the continuous production (PA1-4 to PA1-5, PB2-1, PB2-2, PA3-1, PA3-2 corresponding to the fact that the variation pattern executes the continuous production). , PB4-1, PB4-2, PA5-1, PA5-2, and PC1-3), the type of continuous effect is set to “pseudo-continuous”, “ This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of “notification series” and “slide pseudo-series”. In this embodiment, “pseudo train”, “notice train”, and “slide pseudo train” are determined at an equal ratio, but whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” is determined. Depending on the variation pattern, such as whether it is non-reach loss or non-reach loss, or the number of times of execution of the continuous production, the decision rate of “pseudo-run”, “notice run-up”, “slide pseudo-run” should be different May be. By doing in this way, the reliability which becomes "big hit" and the reliability which becomes reach can be varied according to the type of continuous performance. In the case where the determination ratios of the “pseudo train”, “notice train”, and “slide pseudo train” are different, the reliability that becomes “big hit” and the reliability that becomes reach is set to “pseudo train”> “slide pseudo train”> You may make it become high in order of "notice continuous." This corresponds to the suggestion effect when the continuous effect is repeated, in the descending order of the number of effect symbols to be stopped. If the reliability is increased in this order, the player can easily recognize the high reliability. Further, in the suggestion effect, the greater the number of effect symbols to be stopped, the greater the impact given to the player, so that the magnitude of the impact given to the player can be associated with the high degree of reliability.

  FIG. 15A shows a list of continuous performance patterns. As shown in FIG. 15A, a plurality of continuous effect patterns are provided in accordance with the number of times of continuous effect repetition. Corresponding to the number of repetitions being 1, continuous production patterns A1-1, A1-2, and A1-3 are provided.

  In the continuous effect pattern A1-1, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 2 (second stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying one character image are executed. FIG. 11 is a continuous effect pattern in which a notice effect of “step-up operation” up to STEP 2 (second stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying two character images are executed when the continuous effect is repeated for the first time. . In the continuous effect pattern A1-1, the effect time during which the first notice effect is executed and the effect time during which the second notice effect is executed are equal.

  In the continuous effect pattern A1-2, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 2 (second stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying one character image are executed. FIG. 11 is a continuous effect pattern in which a notice effect of “step-up operation” up to STEP 2 (second stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying two character images are executed when the continuous effect is first repeated. . In continuous effect pattern A1-2, the time for which the first notice effect is executed is shorter than the time for which the second notice effect is executed. The total effect time is determined in accordance with the variation pattern, and is the same as the continuous effect pattern A1-1.

  In the continuous effect pattern A1-3, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 3 (third stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying two character images are executed. These are continuous effect patterns in which a notice effect of “step-up operation” up to STEP 3 (third stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying two character images are executed when the continuous effect is repeated for the first time. . In the continuous effect pattern A1-3, the time for which the first notice effect is executed is longer than the time for which the second notice effect is executed. The total effect time is determined in accordance with the variation pattern, and is the same as the continuous effect pattern A1-1.

  FIG. 16A shows a configuration example of a continuous performance pattern determination table 161A stored in the ROM. When the continuous production pattern determination table 161A repeats the continuous production once (when the variation pattern is PA1-4, PB2-1, PB4-1, PC1-3 corresponding to repeating the continuous production once), It is a table referred to in order to determine a continuous effect pattern in any one of A1-1, A1-2, and A1-3 based on random number value SR2 for continuous effect pattern determination. In the continuous performance pattern determination table 161A, the assignment of the determined value to each continuous performance pattern differs depending on which of the variation patterns (variable display results) is. Specifically, in the order of the continuous performance pattern A1-3> A1-2> A1-1, the reliability that the variable display result is “big hit” and the reliability that becomes reach are high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, continuous production patterns A1-5, A2-1, A2-2, and A2-3 are provided corresponding to the number of repetitions of the continuous production being two. Yes.

  In the continuous effect pattern A2-1, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 2 (second stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying one character image are executed. When the continuous effect is repeated for the first time, a “step-up motion” notice effect up to STEP 2 (second stage) and a “character notice” notice effect that displays two character images are executed. Is a continuous effect pattern in which a notice effect of “step-up operation” up to STEP 3 (third stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying two character images are executed. In the continuous effect pattern A2-1, the effect time for executing the first notice effect, the effect time for executing the second notice effect, and the effect time for executing the third notice effect are evenly distributed. It has become.

  In the continuous effect pattern A2-2, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 2 (second stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying one character image are executed. When the continuous effect is repeated for the first time, a “step-up motion” notice effect up to STEP 2 (second stage) and a “character notice” notice effect that displays two character images are executed. Is a continuous effect pattern in which a notice effect of “step-up operation” up to STEP 3 (third stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying two character images are executed. In the continuous effect pattern A2-1, the effect time for executing the first notice effect and the effect time for executing the second notice effect are shorter than the effect time for executing the third notice effect. Yes. The total effect time is determined in accordance with the variation pattern, and is the same as the continuous effect pattern A2-1.

  In the continuous effect pattern A2-3, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 3 (third stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying one character image are executed. When the continuous effect is repeated for the first time, a notice effect of “step-up operation” up to STEP 3 (third stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying two character images are executed, and the second effect of the continuous effect is performed. Is a continuous effect pattern in which a notice effect of “step-up operation” up to STEP 3 (third stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying two character images are executed. In the continuous effect pattern A2-1, the effect time for executing the first notice effect is longer than the effect time for executing the second notice effect and the effect time for executing the third notice effect. Yes. The total effect time is determined in accordance with the variation pattern, and is the same as the continuous effect pattern A2-1.

  FIG. 16B shows a configuration example of a continuous effect pattern determination table 161B stored in the ROM. The continuous effect pattern determination table 161B determines the continuous effect pattern when the continuous effect is repeated twice (when the variation pattern is PA1-5, PB2-2, PB4-2 corresponding to repeating the continuous effect twice). It is a table referred to in order to determine a continuous effect pattern in any one of A2-1, A2-2, and A2-3 based on random number value SR2. In the continuous effect pattern determination table 161B, the assignment of the determined value to each continuous effect pattern differs depending on which of the variation patterns (variable display results) is. Specifically, in the order of continuous performance pattern A2-3> A2-2> A2-1, the reliability that the variable display result is “big hit” is high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, in correspondence with the variation pattern in which the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is three and the effect time for executing the continuous effect is short, the continuous effect pattern A1-6, A3-1, A3-2, and A3-3 are provided.

  In the continuous effect pattern A3-1, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 2 (second stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying one character image are executed. When the continuous effect is repeated for the first time, a “step-up motion” notice effect up to STEP 2 (second stage) and a “character notice” notice effect that displays two character images are executed. At the time of repeating, the notice effect of “step-up operation” up to STEP 3 (third stage) and the notice effect of “Character notice” that displays two character images are executed, and STEP 3 (3 (Step up action) notice effect and “character notice notice” that displays two character images A continuous effect pattern effect is performed. In the continuous effect pattern A3-1, the effect time for executing the first notice effect, the effect time for executing the second notice effect, the effect time for executing the third notice effect, and the fourth time The production time in which the notice production is executed is equal.

  In the continuous performance pattern A3-2, a “step-up operation” notice effect from the start of variable display to STEP 2 (second stage) and a “character notice” notice effect that displays one character image are executed. When the continuous effect is repeated for the first time, a “step-up motion” notice effect up to STEP 2 (second stage) and a “character notice” notice effect that displays two character images are executed. At the time of repeating, the notice effect of “step-up operation” up to STEP 3 (third stage) and the notice effect of “Character notice” that displays two character images are executed, and STEP 3 (3 (Step up action) notice effect and “character notice notice” that displays two character images A continuous effect pattern effect is performed. In the continuous effect pattern A3-2, the effect time when the first notice effect is executed, the effect time when the second notice effect is executed, and the effect time when the third notice effect is executed are the fourth time The notice time is shorter than the effect time for execution. The total effect time is determined in accordance with the variation pattern, and is the same as the continuous effect pattern A3-1.

  In the continuous effect pattern A3-3, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 3 (third stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying one character image are executed. When the continuous effect is repeated for the first time, the “step-up motion” notice effect up to STEP 3 (third stage) and the “character notice” notice effect that displays one character image are executed, and the second effect of the continuous effect is performed. At the time of repeating, the notice effect of “step-up operation” up to STEP 3 (third stage) and the notice effect of “Character notice” that displays two character images are executed, and STEP 3 (3 (Step up action) notice effect and “character notice notice” that displays two character images A continuous effect pattern effect is performed. In the continuous effect pattern A3-3, the effect time at which the first notice effect is executed, the effect time at which the second notice effect is executed, the effect time at which the third notice effect is executed, and the fourth time The notice time is longer than the effect time for execution. The total effect time is determined in accordance with the variation pattern, and is the same as the continuous effect pattern A3-1.

  FIG. 16C shows a configuration example of a continuous effect pattern determination table 161C stored in the ROM. The continuous effect pattern determination table 161C is a case where the continuous effect is repeated three times and the effect time is short (the variation pattern is PA3-1 and PA5-1 corresponding to repeating the continuous effect three times in a short time). ) Is a table that is referred to in order to determine the continuous effect pattern as one of A3-1, PA3-2, and PA3-3 based on the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern. In the continuous effect pattern determination table 161C, assignment of the determined value to each continuous effect pattern differs depending on which of the variation patterns (variable display results) is. Specifically, in the order of continuous production pattern A3-3> A3-2> A3-1, the reliability that the variable display result is “big hit” is high. It should be noted that the total number of times that the continuous effect is performed is the case where the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is 2, and the case where the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is 3 and the effect time for executing the continuous effect is a short variation pattern. The production control board 80 may determine whether the production times are equal and the number of repetitions of the continuous production is two or three. In this case, when the variation pattern corresponding to the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is two times, or the variation pattern corresponding to the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is three and the effect time for executing the continuous effect is a short variation pattern The continuous effect pattern may be determined as one of PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA3-1, PA3-2, and PA3-3.

  In the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 15A, it is preferable that the continuous effect pattern that starts with A and has the same last number is to execute the same effect in the same effect time partway through. For example, the first notice effect of the continuous effects in PA1-2, PA2-2, and PA3-2 executes the same effect in the same effect time, and the same effect time in the first repetition in PA2-2 and PA3-2 Execute the same production. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the number of repetitions in the middle of the continuous production, and the interest of the game from deteriorating.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, in correspondence with the variation pattern in which the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is three and the effect time for executing the continuous effect is long, the continuous effect pattern B3-1, B3-2 and B3-3 are provided. The continuous production patterns B3-1, B3-2, and B3-3 have the same production content as the continuous production patterns A3-1, A3-2, and A3-3, but the production time for executing each notice production is continuous production. It is longer than the patterns A3-1, A3-2 and A3-3. Here, as a specific example when the production contents are the same and the production times are different, (1) the same image (moving image) is displayed (reproduced), but the speed at which it is displayed (reproduced) is different, (2) The same image (moving image) is displayed (reproduced), but if the presentation time is short, some images (moving image frames) are omitted, and (3) the same image (moving image) is displayed ( However, in the case where the production time is short, the production may end in the middle.

  FIG. 16D shows a configuration example of a continuous effect pattern determination table 161D stored in the ROM. The continuous effect pattern determination table 161D is a case where the continuous effect is repeated three times and the effect time is short. ) Is a table that is referred to in order to determine the continuous effect pattern as one of B3-1, B3-2, and B3-3 based on the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern. In the continuous performance pattern determination table 161D, the assignment of the determined value to each continuous performance pattern differs depending on which of the variation patterns (variable display results) is. Specifically, in the order of continuous production pattern B3-3> B3-2> B3-1, the reliability that the variable display result is “big hit” is high.

  FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a list of notice effect patterns corresponding to the effect forms of the notice effect executed when the continuous effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 15B, continuous effect patterns A0-1, A0-2, A0-3 are provided.

  In the continuous effect pattern A0-1, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 2 (second stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying one character image are executed. This is a notice effect pattern.

  In the continuous effect pattern A0-2, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 2 (second stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying two character images are executed. This is a notice effect pattern.

  In the continuous effect pattern A0-3, a notice effect of “step-up operation” from the start of variable display to STEP 3 (third stage) and a notice effect of “character notice” for displaying two character images are executed. This is a notice effect pattern.

  FIG. 16E shows a configuration example of the notice effect pattern determination table 162 stored in the ROM. The notice effect pattern determination table 162 indicates that the continuous effect is not executed (PA1-4 to PA1-5, PB2-1, PB2-2, PA3-1, PA3-2 corresponding to the fact that the change pattern executes the continuous effect). , PB4-1, PB4-2, PA5-1, PA5-2, and PC1-3), the announcement effect pattern is A0-1, A0- based on the random value SR2 for continuous effect pattern determination. 2 or A0-3 is a table that is referred to for determination. In the notice effect pattern determination table 162, the assignment of the decision value to each notice effect pattern differs depending on which of the variation patterns (variable display results) is. Specifically, in the order of the notice effect pattern A0-3> A0-2> A0-1, the reliability that the variable display result is “big hit” and the reliability that becomes reach are high.

  In this embodiment, the initial notice effect in the continuous effect and the notice effect at the time of repetition are determined at a time by determining the continuous effect pattern. Which notice effect is to be executed at each timing? May be determined individually. Further, in this embodiment, the notice effect of “character notice” and the notice effect of “step-up operation” are determined as a set. (Production mode) may be determined individually.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by (1) variation time, (2) presence / absence of execution of continuous production, (3) number of repetitions of continuous production, and (4) production time of continuous production in variation time. Thus, it is determined on the main board 31 side, and (5) the type of continuous effect (6) the effect content (continuous effect pattern) of the continuous effect is determined on the effect control board 80 side. Of these, except for the determination of (1), it may be determined by either the main board 31 or the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a repetition presence / absence determination table and a suggestion effect mode determination table. The repetition presence / absence determination table shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (B) is a table used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect after the suggestion effect is executed. FIG. 17A shows a repeat presence / absence determination table used for a loss, and FIG. 17B shows a repeat presence / absence determination table used for a big hit. In this embodiment, there are provided a case where the notice effect is executed after the suggestion effect that suggests that the notice effect is repeated and a case where the notice effect is not executed even though the suggestion effect is executed. It has been. By using the repeat presence determination table to determine whether or not the notice effect is to be executed after the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the notice effect is executed repeatedly. Can be improved. As shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (B), “with repeat” sets more judgment values than “without repeat”, so when the suggestive effect is executed, the notice effect is repeatedly executed. The case where it does is decided at a higher rate than the case where the notice effect is not repeatedly executed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, a larger number of determination values are assigned to “repetition present” in the case of big hit than in the case of loss. Therefore, when the “repeated presence” is determined (that is, when the notice effect is repeated after the suggestion effect is executed), the reliability of the jackpot (the ratio of occurrence of the jackpot) is higher.

  The suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 17C is a table used to determine the suggestion effect mode (suggest effect pattern). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17C, a suggestive effect mode A and a suggestive effect mode B are provided as suggested effect modes. Note that the suggestion presentation modes A and B of the notice run are shown in FIG. 50 (FIG. 51 also shows a modification of the suggestion presentation mode), and the suggestion presentation modes A and B of the slide pseudo-run are shown in FIG. Show.

  As shown in FIG. 17C, the case where “repeated” is determined using the repetition presence / absence determination table shown in FIGS. Numerous determination values are set for the suggestion effect mode B ”. Accordingly, the notice effect is executed after the suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate when the suggestion effect of the suggestion effect aspect B is executed than when the suggestion effect of the suggestion effect aspect A is executed.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an appearance timing determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, three types of appearance timings A to C are provided as the appearance timing of the suggestive effect. The appearance timing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the appearance timings A to C are determined depending on the case where “repeated” is determined and the case where “repeated” is determined using the repetition presence / absence determination table shown in FIGS. Different numbers of judgment values are set for this. Therefore, the notice effect is repeatedly executed after the suggestion effect is executed at a different rate according to the appearance timing at which the suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is executed at the appearance timing A, the announcement effect is executed after execution of the suggestion effect at a rate of 2/5, and when the suggestion effect is executed at the appearance timing B, 4/7 When the suggestion effect is executed after execution of the suggestion effect at a rate, and when the suggestion effect is executed at the appearance timing C, the notice effect is executed after the execution of the suggestion effect at a rate of 2/3.

  The ROM mounted on the effect control board 80 includes the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED, the operation buttons 120, and the movable member 34 provided for the effect object. In order to control the production operation using the production device (production electrical component), a plurality of types of pattern data constituting the production control pattern are stored in advance. As such an effect control pattern, for example, a symbol variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, a hit effect control pattern, and the like may be included.

  The symbol variation control pattern relates to the variable display operation of the effect symbol in the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from the start of variable display of the effect symbol to the stop effect display of the final effect symbol that becomes the final stop symbol. What is necessary is just to be comprised from the pattern data etc. which show the content of control, and two or more prepared beforehand for every variation pattern of effect design. Further, different symbol variation control patterns may be prepared corresponding to a plurality of types of effect modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Each of the plurality of symbol variation control patterns has a display position of the effect symbol in the variable display of the effect symbol performed using a final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol, a temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped during variable display, or the like. It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as the size, direction of variation of the production symbol, and variation speed. Here, the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol, and the like are determined at the start of variable display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. If it is.

  The notice effect control pattern is composed of pattern data indicating the control content of the effect operation in the notice effect, and may be prepared in advance for each of the notice effect patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation in the notice effect. For example, each of the plurality of notice effect control patterns is prepared in advance to execute a plurality of notice patterns prepared in advance for executing a notice effect of “character notice” or a notice effect of “notice during operation”. Corresponding to one of a plurality of notice patterns, the display position and size of the effect image, the update display procedure, the setting of the operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation action on the operation button 120, the switching of the effect operation at the time of detecting the operation It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as setting. Further, the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the presence / absence or type of continuous effect, the presence / absence of special notice effect, or the effect mode is facilitated.

  The win-time effect control pattern indicates the control contents of the effect operation in the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state after the special figure display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit” or “small hit”. Whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, and whether the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change” or “surprising” It is sufficient if a plurality is prepared in advance.

  FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of such various effect control patterns. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 19A, the effect control pattern includes various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is composed of process data serving as control data for control, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit, and the execution time of each effect operation A determination value corresponding to (production time) is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 31, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 101. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 such as data indicating the variation mode of each effect symbol during the variable display of the effect symbols. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 27, such as data indicating an output mode of a sound effect or the like interlocked with the variable display operation of the effect symbol during the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 27. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a frame LED 28 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. In the operation detection control data, for example, an operation operation period using the operation button 120 such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation button 120, data for designating the control content of the effect operation when it is detected effectively Is included. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data configured to include all of the display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data, or process data configured to include a part of these. Further, for example, various other control data such as movable member control data indicating an operation mode of the movable member 34 included in the effect accessory may be included.

  FIG. 19B shows various rendering operations executed according to the content of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 101 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the effect design process is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the display screen of the effect display device 9. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 27 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to blink a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 in a mode specified by the lamp control data. Control for accepting an operation on the operation button 120 in a designated operation valid period and determining the content of the effect is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that is not a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of the effect symbol. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 101 emits light from the effect devices (effect display device 9, speaker 27, frame LED 28, etc.) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. Control the body). In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the production control pattern thus set is output from the production control CPU 101 to the display control unit 123, the audio output board 70, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 101, for example, a predetermined VDP 109 or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. Further, in the audio output board 70 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 101, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM 55 is accessible. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (power failure recovery 1 designation command) as an initialization command at the time of power supply restoration to the effect control board 80 (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination or the like is one round (minimum value that can be taken by random numbers) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control is performed in accordance with winning detection based on any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag relating to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. If the speed is high, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S26 shown in FIG. 21 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 56 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 56 firstly selects the first start provided corresponding to the first start winning opening of the first start opening switch 13a and the second start opening switch 14a shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the mouth switch 13a is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the start port buffer value that is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to “ 1 "(step S202).

  When the detection signal from the first start opening switch 13a is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), the second start winning opening provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set. 2. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the start port switch 14a is on (step S203). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 14a is in the OFF state (step S203; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 14a is on (step S203; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S204).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S202 and S204, the CPU 56 reads the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S205). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit is read, and the starting port buffer value is “ If “2”, the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S205 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S206). At this time, if the read value in step S205 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is effectively established. For example, when it is determined in step S201 that the detection signal from the first starter switch 13a is in the on state, and in step S206, it is determined that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, the first special symbol. The first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the display unit 8a and the variable display of the effect symbols is established. If it is determined in step S203 that the detection signal from the second start port switch 14a is in the on state and then it is determined in step S206 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, the second special symbol. A second start condition for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the display 8b and a variable display of the effect symbol is established.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S206 (step S206; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the total pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter indicating the total pending storage number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( Step S208).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S208, the CPU 56, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 and the random counter, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for type determination is extracted (step S209). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, thereby storing each random value (step S210). . For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, 2 Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the special figure reservation storage unit. At this time, when the start port buffer value is “1” at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit, the “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning port is stored, When the starting port buffer value is “2”, “second” starting data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning port is stored.

  After the random value is stored in step S210, a winning specific pattern determination process is executed (step S211). Subsequently, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 54 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Is set (step S212). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process is completed. Is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG.

  When the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S206 (step S206; Yes), after executing the process of step S212, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S213). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S213; Yes), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S214), and then shown in FIG. The process proceeds to step S203. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2” (step S213; No), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S215), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends.

  24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the winning specific pattern determination process executed in step S211 of FIG. In this embodiment, when variably displaying special symbols and effect symbols is started, the special symbol display result is displayed as “big hit” or “small hit” in special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 22, FIG. 27) described later. ”Or a jackpot type is determined. In a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 22 and FIG. 28) described later, the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined. . On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 56 executes the specific pattern determination process at the time of winning in step S211 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Thus, it is specified in advance whether or not the special figure display result is a “big hit”, whether or not the big hit type when the “big hit” is reached, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the production pattern is a fluctuation pattern with at least super reach. . As a result, it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” during the big hit gaming state before the variable display of the effect symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, and this prediction result On the basis of the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 or the like determines whether or not to execute the notice effect during the big hit.

  In the winning specific pattern determination process shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the CPU 56 first specifies a special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted in step S209 of FIG. (Step S351). For example, in the process of step S351, the special figure display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 9 is selected and set in the usage table. Here, when setting the usage table, the storage address (head address) of the table data in the ROM 54 may be set in a table pointer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55, for example. Subsequently, by referring to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in the use table, the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 extracted in step S209 is specified. More specifically, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is compared with the determined value stored in the special figure display result determination table 130, and the special figure display to which the determined value matching the random value MR1 is assigned. Specify whether the result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. Here, regardless of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is specified by referring to the table data corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state in the special figure display result determination table 130. That's fine.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result specified in step S351 is “lost” (step S352). At this time, if the specified special figure display result is “losing” (step S352; Yes), the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S209 of FIG. 23 is the non-reach variation pattern common range. It is determined whether it is within the range (step S353).

  Here, in the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 11C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of memories, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “1” to “99”, at least a variation pattern type including a variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) with no reach effect. It will be determined as one of CA1-1 to CA1-3. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, if the random number MR3 is within the range of “1” to “99”, it is assumed that the random reach variation pattern is within the common range of the non-reach variation pattern. It may be determined whether or not it is within the range.

  When it is determined in step S353 that it is within the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range (step S353; Yes), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S354). If the start port buffer value is “1” (step S354; “1”), the first start port winning designation command is used to notify that the first reach winning pattern is within the non-reach variation pattern common range. After setting for transmitting the 1st prize determination result notification command B100H (see FIG. 5C) from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S355), the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated. To do.

  When it is determined in step S354 that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S354; “2”), the second notification that the non-reach variation pattern is within the common range at the time of the second start winning is made. After setting for transmitting the sixth prize determination result notification command B200H (see FIG. 5C), which is a start opening prize designation command, from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S356), The specific pattern determination process at the time of winning is completed.

  When it is determined in step S353 that it is not within the non-reach variation pattern common range (step S353; No), the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S209 in FIG. It is determined whether it is within the range (step S357).

  Here, in the setting example of the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C shown in FIG. 11C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of memories, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “230” to “251”, at least super reach (super reach α or super The variation pattern type CA2-4 including a variation pattern (super reach variation pattern) with reach β) is determined. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, if the random number MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it is assumed that the random value MR3 is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. It may be determined whether or not it is within the range.

  When it is determined in step S357 that it is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern (step S357; Yes), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S358). If the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S358; “1”), the second starting port winning designation command is used to notify that the first reach winning prize is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. After setting for transmitting the 1st prize determination result notification command B101H (see FIG. 5C) from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S359), the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated. To do. If it is determined in step S358 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S358; “2”), the second notification that the super-reach variation pattern is within the common range at the time of the second starting winning is made. After setting for transmitting the seventh prize determination result notification command B201H (see FIG. 5C), which is a start opening prize designation command, from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S360), The specific pattern determination process at the time of winning is completed.

  When it is determined in step S357 that it is not within the common range of the super reach variation pattern (step S357; No), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S361). If the start port buffer value is “1” (step S361; “1”), the first start notification is made that it is not within the non-reach variation pattern common range or the super reach variation pattern common range at the first start winning. After setting for transmitting the fifth prize determination result notification command B104H (see FIG. 5C), which is a start opening prize designation command, from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S362), The specific pattern determination process at the time of winning is completed.

  If it is determined in step S361 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S361; “2”), even within the non-reach variation pattern common range at the time of the second start winning, it is within the super reach variation pattern common range. However, a setting for transmitting the 10th winning determination result notification command B204H (see FIG. 5C), which is the second start opening winning designation command for notifying that, is sent from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. After performing (step S363), the winning specific pattern determining process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S352 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S352; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” or “non-probable change”. In other words, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “15R big hit” (“15R probable big hit”, “15R non-probable big hit”) (step S364 in FIG. 25). In step S364, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is compared with the determined value stored in the special figure display result determining table 130, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is “big hit”. In addition, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is compared with the determined value stored in the jackpot type determining table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating that the jackpot type corresponds to “probable change” or “non-probable change”.

  When it is determined in step S364 that the special figure display result is “15R big hit” (step S364; No), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S365). ). Here, if the start port buffer value is “1” in step S365 (step S365; “1”), the first start port for notifying that the variable display result is “15R big hit” at the time of the first start winning. After setting for transmitting a third prize determination result notification command B102H (see FIG. 5C), which is a prize designation command, from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S366), at the time of winning. The specific pattern determination process ends. If it is determined in step S365 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S365; “2”), the second display is notified that the variable display result will be “15R big hit”. After the setting for transmitting the 8th prize determination result notification command B202H (see FIG. 5C), which becomes the 2 start opening prize designation command, is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S367). Then, the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S364 that the special figure display result is not “15R big hit” (step S364; No), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S368). ). Here, if the starting port buffer value is “1” in step S368 (step S368; “1”), it is notified that the variable display result is “small hit” or “surprise” at the first starting winning prize. After setting for transmitting the fifth winning determination result notification command B104H (see FIG. 5C), which is the first start opening winning designation command, from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (step S369). ), The winning specific pattern determination process is terminated. If it is determined in step S368 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S368; “2”), the variable display result becomes “small hit” or “surprise” at the time of the second starting prize. After the setting for transmitting the tenth winning determination result notification command B204H (see FIG. 5C), which is the second start opening winning designation command for notifying the player, from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed. (Step S370), the winning specific pattern determination process is terminated.

  By executing the winning specific pattern determination process, when a game ball that has passed through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is detected, the variable display result, the jackpot type, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Regardless of the game state and the total number of reserved memories of special figure games, whether or not it will be at least a variation pattern without reach production, or at least a super reach variation pattern with super reach Then, the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command which differ depending on the specific result can be transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 56 performs the following processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit. Execute.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit and the second special symbol storage unit. A determination is made as to whether or not to start the special game according to 8b. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the final special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the result of determining whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, Corresponding to the determination result of the pattern type, processing for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is included.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation processing includes processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit, is decremented or incremented by 1 Regardless of whether the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the special symbol display 8a or the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, it is passed by the common timer. Time measurements are taken. It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed by the first special symbol display 8a using the first special symbol in the special symbol game or the second special symbol display 8b. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b are used to stop the variation of the special symbol and to stop and display the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is on. If the big hit flag is on, the special figure process flag value is set to “4”. Update to "". When the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to 15 rounds big hit state corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. In addition to the setting, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “15 times”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is controlled to be “surprise” and is controlled to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. At the same time, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “2 times”.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 21 may be executed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is performed by an effect device such as the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, and the frame LED 28. And a process for performing various settings for controlling to a probable change state and a short time state corresponding to the big hit type.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”, and the big winning opening in the variable winning operation is set. The number of times of opening may be set to “twice”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 21 for the big winning opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process waits until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, etc. Processing to be included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 27, the CPU 56 first determines whether the total reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit is “0”, that is, the first reserved memory count. It is determined whether or not the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the second reserved memory numbers is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total pending storage number count value is other than “0” (step S231; No), the start data is read from the start data storage unit (step S232). At this time, the start data stored in the start data storage unit in association with the hold number “1” may be read.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory count value, the total reserved memory count is updated to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit is subordinate to the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted upward by one entry (step S233A). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S232 is “first” or “second” (step S233B).

  If it is determined in step S233B that the start data is “first” (step S233B; first), the first special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a is started. In response to the establishment of the 1 start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit is set to “1” (step S234). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S233B that the start data is “first” (step S233B; second), a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is started. In response to the establishment of the second start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S235).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S235, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value (step S236). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the special figure display result determination result is stored as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit. Numerical data indicating the random value MR1, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the special figure display result is stored as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determination, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out. The numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR1 to MR3 read out in this manner is temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55, for example, by storing it in a special figure changing random value buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Just do it.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, the reserved memory number count value corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is decremented by 1, and the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is used from the holding number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S237). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the storage contents of the reserved data in the first special figure reservation memory unit are higher by one entry. Shift to. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the storage content of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is 1 Shift entries up one place.

  Following the processing of step S237, the special figure display is used as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. The result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S238). The CPU 56 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this manner, so that the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number MR1 read in step S237 is “big hit” or “small”. Whether to display the special figure display result as "big hit", "small hit", or "lose" depending on which of the decision values assigned to each special figure display result of "Bon" or "Lose" Is determined (step S239). Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S239 is “big hit” (step S240).

  If it is determined in step S240 that the game is a “hit” (step S240; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is set to the on state (step S241). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S242). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type read in step S236, such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change” in advance. A plurality of jackpot types prepared are determined (step S243). If the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S235, the decision value is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type decision table 131. The jackpot type is not determined to be “accurate”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by updating the jackpot type buffer value that is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step S244). As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S240 that it is not “big hit” (step S240; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S245). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S245; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is set to the on state (step S246).

  If it is determined in step S245 that it is not “small hit” (step S245; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S244 and S246, is it controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state? A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination as to whether or not, and further according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state (step S247). As an example, if it is determined in step S245 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, the result is a lost pattern corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S245 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the winning symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, “7” are determined according to the big hit type determination result in step S243. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “accuracy”, the special symbol indicating the number of the big hit symbol “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S247, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S248), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S249), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting in step S250, for example, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the production display device 9 is sent from the main board 31 to the production control board 80. In contrast, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not yet transmitted, the transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed by setting the storage address of the customer waiting demonstration designation command table in the ROM 54 in the transmission command buffer, for example. The customer waiting demo designation command set in this way is, for example, a diagram after special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 28, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining any of the plurality of fluctuation pattern types (step S261). S262). Further, for example, by reading the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit, it is specified whether the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probable change”, or “surprise change” (step S263). .

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types ( Step S265).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in step S264 (step S264; No), it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state is being executed is set (step S264). S266).

  When the time reduction flag is OFF in step S266 (step S266; No), it is determined whether or not the total reserved storage number count value is “3” or more (step S267). If the total reserved storage number is less than “3” (step S267; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected and set (step S268). On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is on in step S266 (step S266; Yes), or when the total reserved storage number count value is “3” or more in step S267 (step S267; Yes), the fluctuation occurs. The loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of pattern types (step S269). Even when the time reduction flag is on in step S266, it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “1” or the like), and a different determination table is set according to the determination result. You may choose. For example, when the hourly flag is on, if the total reserved memory number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S268 to select and set the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, while the total reserved memory number If the value is “1” or more, the process may proceed to step S269 to select and set the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S263, S265, S268, and S269, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type stored in the special figure variation random value buffer or the like. By referring to the use table set in any one of S263, S265, S268, and S269, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S270). Here, in the process of step S270, for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like at the time of detecting the start winning and stored as the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit or the second special figure hold storage unit. A variation pattern type is determined based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3. Therefore, it is possible to match the determination result of whether or not it is within the range of the specific pattern common range when the start winning is detected and the determination result of the variation pattern type by the process of step S270, and specify when the start winning is detected. It can be prevented that a variation pattern type different from a variation pattern type including a specific variation pattern with super reach is determined despite being determined to be within the pattern common range. Further, based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first special symbol display 8a determines the variation pattern type of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol, or the second start Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol indicator 8b based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, a common random counter, etc. Using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern type updated by the above, the common processing module can determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S270, the loss variation pattern determination table 133A and the hit variation pattern determination are performed according to whether the special figure display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. One of the tables 133B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S271). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S271 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S272). The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 503, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, or the like when the process of step S272 is executed, or the first start winning opening And a game ball that has entered the second start winning opening (start winning prize) is extracted in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit together with the random numbers MR1 to MR3. It may be stored as reserved data.

  In the process of step S272, based on the establishment of the first starting condition, the first special symbol display 8a determines the variation pattern of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol, Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol indicator 8b based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied, Using the numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as any of a plurality of types by a common processing module. Further, in the process of step S272, regardless of the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S270, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Either can be determined.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S272, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S273). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S274). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S274, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol change are performed (step S275). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 56 performs a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 54 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 56 performs a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 54 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area. If the setting in step S275 is performed, the figure is not displayed after the variation pattern setting process is completed. Each time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 5 is executed, a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 A result notification command and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. The game state designation command and the pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S276), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stopping process shown in FIG. 29, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit.

  Subsequent to the process of step S292, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 54 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer. As a result, after the special symbol stop process is finished? When the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 5 is executed, a hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. After the setting in step S293, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S295). For example, in the process of step S295, the CPU 56 performs a process of clearing the probability variation flag and the short time flag to turn off, a process of clearing the short time counter for counting the number of remaining special game games in the short time state, and the like. Just do it. Subsequently, the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is set to the on state (step S304). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step S297; Yes), a small hit start start waiting time is set (step S298). For example, in the process of step S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer. Subsequently, as in the process of step S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S299). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S300). Further, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step 301).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S297 (step S297; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S302). After executing one of the processes in steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is to be terminated (step S303), and the special symbol stop process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S303, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control in the time reduction state may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. It should be noted that for the probability variation state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability variation flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to end the time reduction control even in the probability variation state, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result that the time reduction control ends. In this way, when the time reduction control is ended, the probability variation control may be terminated at the same time, so that the normal state may be obtained. For the probability variation control, until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or further It may be continued until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed.

  In the process of step S303, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control termination determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, and a probability variation control termination determination table stored in advance in the ROM 54 or the like. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is to be ended by referring to the above or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S303, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process for determining whether or not the probability variation control is to be terminated based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the probability variation control end is, for example, in step S231 illustrated in FIG. May be executed before determining (predetermined) the special figure display result in step S240.

  FIG. 30A is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 30 (A), the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening process for the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 22, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, the timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit is read (step S312). Then, the setting for starting control of the gaming state according to the read value in step S312 is performed (step S313). FIG. 30B shows a setting example in step S313. As shown in FIG. 30 (B), when the big hit type buffer read value is “0”, a setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the time-saving state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag to the ON state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. Set to the counter. When the big hit type buffer read value is “1” or “2”, a setting for starting control for changing the gaming state to the probable change state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state.

  After performing the setting in step S313, the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is cleared to the off state (step S315), the special figure process flag is cleared, and the value is initialized to “0”. (Step S314), the jackpot end process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 80 will be described. In the effect control board 80, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 101 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 31 is started, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 80. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, the effect random number update process is executed (step S402), and among the effect random numbers used for effect control, numerical data indicating a random number value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit is displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the production control board 80, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 31 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 101 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 101 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, the effect control process process is executed (step S406), and the process returns to step S402. In the effect control process in step S406, for example, an effect image display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9, a sound output operation from the speaker 27, a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the frame LED 28, and the movable member 34 provided in the effect accessory. The control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as the driving operation in, is determined, determined and set according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 31 and the like.

  In the command analysis process in step S405, for example, a start winning command process as shown in FIG. 32 may be executed. In the start winning command process shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not it has received a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second start opening winning designation command). Determination is made (step S501). The received effect control command is stored in the effect control command reception buffer, and the effect control CPU 101 reads the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer and confirms the contents, thereby receiving the received effect control command. A control command can be specified. At this time, if the start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S501; No), the start winning time command processing is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S501 that the start opening winning designation command has been received (step S501; Yes), the winning determination result is specified by reading the EXT data in the starting opening winning specifying command, for example (step S502). . Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores the specified winning determination result at the head of the empty entry in the effect control hold storage unit 195 shown in FIG. 33 (step S503), and ends the start winning command processing. As shown in FIG. 33, the production control hold storage unit 195 associates with the hold number that is the order in which the hold data is digested, and holds the hold data corresponding to any start port (“first” or “second”). Is stored, and a winning determination result corresponding to the hold data is stored. In the effect control board 80, by referring to the winning determination result in the effect control hold storage unit 195, it is specified whether or not there is hold data that becomes “15R big hit”, and the notice effect during the big hit can be executed. it can.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the following processes of steps S160 to S166, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit. And run.

  The effect symbol variation start waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the effect symbol change start waiting process, the effect display device 9 depends on whether one of the first change start command and the second change start command is received as the change start command transmitted from the main board 31. Includes a process for determining whether to start variable display of effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. . At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” in response to the determination to start variable display.

  The effect symbol variation setting process of step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the effect symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. In order to perform various production operations including variable display of production symbols, in accordance with variation patterns, variable display results, etc., finalized design symbols that become final stop symbols, temporary stop symbols, notice patterns, etc. The process to determine is included. In addition, the effect symbol variation setting process includes a process of updating the effect image in the continuous effect and a variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special diagram in which the variable display result is “losing”. Based on the start, a process for performing a setting for interrupting the continuous effect, and a variable display of the effect symbol is started in correspondence with the special game using the first special figure during the interruption of the continuous effect A process for performing setting for resuming the continuous production based on the game, and a production design corresponding to the special game using the second special figure in which the variable display result is “hit” such as “big hit” or “small hit” In addition, a process for making a setting for ending the continuous production based on the start of the variable display is included. In the effect symbol variation setting process, various effect control patterns such as a symbol variation control pattern and a notice effect control pattern are set based on these determination results. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The effect symbol changing process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect symbol variation processing, various controls are performed from the symbol variation control pattern, the notice effect control pattern, etc., corresponding to the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit. Processing for reading out data and performing various effect controls during variable display of effect symbols is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of the effect symbol is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when an effect symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 31 is received. Correspondingly, the definite effect symbol as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result of the effect symbol is completely stopped and displayed. If the final effect design is displayed in full stop in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if it does not depend on the production control command from the main board 31, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the decided production symbol on the production control board 80 side. When the confirmed effect symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The effect symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The effect symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the effect process flag is set to “4” when the special figure display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. For the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, a hit effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The voice LED and the sound output from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 70, and the frame LED 28 and decoration by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp driver board 35. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the LEDs for use. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 31.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hitting control effect process, for example, a hitting effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “small hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the effect display device 9. Displaying on the display screen, outputting sound and sound effect from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 13, and outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp driver board 35, frame LED 28. And a process for controlling various performance operations in the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 31.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, a hit effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or outputting a voice or sound effect from the speaker 27 by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound output board 70, or outputting a frame LED 28 or a decoration LED by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp driver board 35 Processing for controlling various effect operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the button, is included. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the effect symbol variation setting process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a final stop symbol determination process (step S551).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the final stop symbol determination process executed in step S551. In the final stop symbol determination process shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 101 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 31, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S751). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S751; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31, for example. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” (step S752).

  If it is determined in step S752 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S752; Yes), after determining a combination of definite effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination (step S753), The final stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S753, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit is extracted and stored in advance in a ROM or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is determined among the determined effect symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determining table stored in advance in a ROM or the like is extracted. By referring to the determined effect symbol, the right determined effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9 </ b> R on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right confirmed effect symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed effect symbol by setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined effect symbols, the medium determined effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is determined.

  If it is determined in step S752 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S752; No), after determining the combination of the definitive effect symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination (step S754), the final The stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S754, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit is extracted and stored in advance in a ROM or the like. By referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table, the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R on the display screen of the effect display device 9 among the determined effect symbols are stopped and displayed together. A production symbol having the same symbol number is determined. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like is referred to By doing so, the medium determined effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is determined among the determined effect symbols. Here, for example, when the confirmed effect symbol becomes a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed effect symbol becomes the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed effect symbol and the right confirmed effect symbol, any value For example, by adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the medium finalized effect symbol, the finalized symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium finalized effect symbol, a difference (symbol difference) between the symbol number of the left finalized effect symbol and the right finalized effect symbol may be determined, and the medium finalized effect symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S751 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S751; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S755). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit type is “surprise” or the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S755; Yes), the big hit type such as one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 is “ After determining the combination of the definitive effect symbols that will be the variable display result of the effect symbol corresponding to the case of “surprise” or the special symbol display result of “small hit” (step S756), the final stop symbol determination process is terminated. . As an example, corresponding to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbols constituting any of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 and The combination of the determined production symbols is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating random numbers for chance eye determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in a ROM or the like is extracted. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite effect design which comprises either of the 2nd open chance eyes TC1-TC4 by referring. Further, when any one of the fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and the fluctuation pattern PC1-5 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, for example, by executing the same processing as in step S754, the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination are performed. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite effect design which becomes.

  When it is determined in step S755 that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” other than “probability” (step S755; No), the final stop constituting the big hit combination After determining the combination of the determined effect symbols to be symbols (step S757), the final stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S757, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit is extracted, and then stored in advance in a ROM or the like. By referring to the predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, the stop display is aligned with the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the display screen of the effect display device 9. An effect symbol having the same symbol number is determined.

  After the final stop symbol determination process as described above is executed in step S551 in FIG. 35, a variable display effect setting process is executed (step S552). FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect setting process executed in step S552. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 101 first performs “slip” according to the change pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31, for example. It is determined whether or not it is “with slip” that executes the variable display effect of “” (step S771).

  If it is determined in step S771 that there is “slip” (step S771; Yes), an effect symbol that is a pre-slip temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped in the “slip” variable display effect is determined (step S772). As an example, in the process of step S772, numerical data indicating random values for determining the pre-slip temporary stop symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit is extracted and stored in advance in a ROM or the like. By referring to a predetermined pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination table, an effect symbol that becomes the pre-slip temporary stop symbol may be determined.

  When it is determined in step S771 that there is no “slip” (step S771; No), after executing the process of step S772, the variable display effect setting process is terminated.

  After executing the variable display effect setting process as described above in step S552 of FIG. 35, the notice effect setting process is executed (step S553). FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S553. In the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 38, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not to execute the notice effect when the continuous effect type or the process for determining the type of continuous effect or the continuous effect pattern is not executed. And the continuous effect setting process for determining the notice effect pattern in the case of performing is performed (step S701). Details of the continuous effect setting process will be described later.

  After the continuous production setting process is executed in step S701, a big hit confirmation notification effect setting process for determining whether or not to execute the big hit decision notification production setting is executed (step S702). Details of the big hit confirmation notification effect will be described later.

  After the big hit confirmation notification effect setting process is executed in step S702, a prefetch effect setting process for determining whether or not to execute the prefetch notice effect setting is executed (step S703). Details of the pre-reading notice effect setting process will be described later.

  After the pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed in step S703, the moving object notice effect setting process for determining whether or not to execute the movable object notice effect setting is executed (step S704). Details of the movable object notice effect setting process will be described later. After the movable object notice effect setting process is executed in step S704, the notice effect setting process is finished.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the continuous effect setting process executed in step S701. In the continuous effect setting process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 101 first performs “continuous effect” in accordance with, for example, the variation pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is to execute the variable display effect (step S841).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the variable display effect of “continuous effect” (step S841; Yes), the continuous effect type determination table 160 shown in FIG. 14 is set (step S842).

  Then, by referring to the continuous effect type determination table 160 set in the process of step S842 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect type, the type of the continuous effect is set to “pseudo-continuous”, “notice” “Ream” or “Slip pseudo-ream” is determined (step S843).

  Subsequently, the continuous effect pattern determination tables 161A to 161D shown in FIGS. 16A to 16D are selected and set according to the number of repetitions (variation patterns) of the continuous effect (step S844).

  Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern, the continuous effect pattern is determined by referring to the continuous effect pattern determination tables 161A to 161D set in the process of step S844 (step S845). .

  Here, when the continuous effect type determined in the process of step S843 is “pseudo-continuous” or “slide pseudo-ream”, an effect symbol that is temporarily displayed when the continuous effect is repeated is determined (step S846). In the process of step S846, when the continuous effect type is “pseudo-continuous”, the effect symbol constituting any one of the pseudo-continuous chance points GC1 to GC8 that are temporarily displayed is determined. As an example, in the process of step S774, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the pseudo-continuous chance updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit is extracted, and predetermined data stored in advance in a ROM or the like is extracted. By referring to the pseudo-continuous chance item determination table, a temporary stop display is performed every time the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is executed, and an effect symbol constituting any one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is determined. That's fine. Further, when the continuous performance type is “slip pseudo-ream”, an effect symbol that is a temporary stop symbol before slip that is temporarily stopped is determined. As an example, numerical data indicating random values for determining a pre-slip temporary stop symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit is extracted, and a predetermined pre-slip temporary stop stored in advance in a ROM or the like By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., it is only necessary to determine the effect symbol to be the temporary stop symbol before sliding. It should be noted that this process is omitted when the continuous performance type is “notice series”.

  After the processing in step S846, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to repeat as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, depending on whether the variation pattern of the continuous effect is the “lost” variation pattern or the “big hit” variation pattern. A table is set (step S847A). Then, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the repeat presence determination table set in the process of step S847A based on the numerical data indicating the repeat determination random number SR6, thereby repeatedly giving the notice effect after execution of the suggestion effect. It is determined whether or not to execute (step S847B). Note that the processing in step S847B is configured to be executed when the number of continuous effects is 1 to 3 times, but is executed when the number of continuous effects is 1 to 2 times. It may be. As described above, when it is determined in step S847B that there is no repetition, the suggestion effect is added once and executed immediately before the end of the notice effect to be executed last. This is because if the fourth suggestion effect is executed due to the non-repeated determination of the variation pattern, the notice effect may not be executed after that.

  Then, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 17 according to whether the determination result of the presence / absence of repetition determined in step S847B is “no repeat” or “with repeat” ( Step S848A). Then, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the suggestion effect mode determination table set in the process of step S848A based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 for suggestion effect mode determination. The suggestion effect mode A "or the" suggest effect mode B "is determined (step S848B).

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the appearance timing determination table shown in FIG. 18 according to whether the determination result of the presence / absence of repetition determined in step S847B is “no repetition” or “with repetition” ( Step S849). Then, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the appearance timing determination table set in the process of step S849 based on the numerical data indicating the appearance timing determination random value SR8, thereby causing the appearance timing A as the appearance timing of the suggested effect. ~ C (step S850). After the process of step S850, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S841 that the variation display effect is not a variable display effect of “continuous effect” (step S841; No), the notice effect pattern determination table 162 shown in FIG. 16E is set (step S851). .

  Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern, the notice effect pattern is determined by referring to the notice effect pattern determination table 162 set in step S847 (step S852). Here, although the notice effect pattern is determined based on the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect pattern, the random value for determining the notice effect pattern is extracted and used as the random value for determining the notice effect pattern. The notice effect pattern may be determined based on the result. After the process of step S848, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 40A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit confirmation notification effect setting process executed in step S702. In the jackpot confirmation notification effect setting process shown in FIG. 40A, the effect control CPU 101 first displays the special figure display result by reading the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 31, for example. It is determined whether or not “big hit” is reached (step S821). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S821; No), the big hit fixed notification effect setting processing is ended.

  If it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S821; Yes), the big hit fixed effect determination table 163 shown in FIG. 40B is set (step S822). The jackpot determined effect determination table 163 shown in FIG. 40B is a table for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot determined notification effect based on the random number SR3 for determining the determination of the jackpot determined notification effect. In the jackpot finalizing determination table 163, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR3 corresponding to the jackpot type is assigned to execute the jackpot finalizing notification effect or not to execute the jackpot finalizing notification effect. ing.

  Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining whether or not to execute the big hit confirmation notification effect, it is determined whether or not to execute the big hit decision effect by referring to the big hit decision effect determination table 163 set in the process of step S822. Determine (step S823). In this embodiment, even when the jackpot type is “2 rounds”, the jackpot confirmation notification effect is executed. However, when the game value of the jackpot gaming state is “2 rounds”, the jackpot determination notification is performed. The production may not be executed. Also, the jackpot confirmation notification effect may be executed only when the jackpot type is a target of execution of the pre-reading effect or the release effect. In this way, by unifying the jackpot type to be notified, the notification target of each effect can be easily understood. After the process of step S823, the jackpot confirmation notification effect setting process is finished.

  FIG. 41A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pre-reading notice effect setting process executed in step S703. In the pre-reading notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 41A, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the hold data is stored in the effect control hold storage unit 195 shown in FIG. 33 (step S621). . At this time, if the hold data is stored in the effect control hold storage unit 195 (step S621; Yes), the winning determination result of the hold data stored in the effect control hold storage unit 195 is read (step S622).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result read in step S622 includes a “15R big hit” (step S623). When a winning determination result of “15R big hit” is included (step S623; Yes), numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for the pre-reading notice effect execution determination is extracted, and the destination shown in FIG. By referring to the reading notice effect determination table 164, it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching notice effect (step S624). The prefetching notice effect determination table 164 shown in FIG. 41B is a table for determining whether or not to execute the prefetching notice effect based on the random value SR4 for determining the prefetching notice effect. In the prefetch notice effect determination table 164, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR4 is assigned to execute the prefetch notice effect or not to execute the prefetch notice effect. After the process of step S624, the big hit announcement effect setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 42A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the movable object notice effect setting process executed in step S704. In the movable object notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 42 (A), the effect control CPU 101 first selects the continuous effect patterns A1-3, A2-3, A3-3, and B3-3 in the continuous effect setting process in step S701. It is determined whether or not any of them has been determined (step S641). At this time, if it is determined that any one of the continuous performance patterns A1-3, A2-3, A3-3, and B3-3 is determined (step S641; No), the movable object notice effect setting processing is terminated. .

  If it is determined that it has been determined other than the continuous effect patterns A1-3, A2-3, A3-3, and B3-3 (step S641; Yes), the movable object notice effect determination table 165 shown in FIG. Is set (step S642). The movable object notice effect determination table 165 shown in FIG. 42B is based on the random number SR5 for determining the movable object notice effect, and whether or not the moveable object notice effect is executed, and the effect mode when it is executed. It is a table for determining the corresponding movable object notice effect pattern. In the movable object notice effect determination table 165, whether the variable display result is “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “big hit” (other than the correct hit), “surprise correct” or “small hit”. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value SR5 corresponding to is assigned to any of “no execution”, “only beat”, “first mode”, and “second mode”.

  Here, the “first mode” is a movable object notice effect pattern corresponding to operating the movable member 34 from a predetermined initial position to the first position. The “second mode” is a movable object notice effect pattern corresponding to operating the movable member 34 from a predetermined initial position to the first position and further to the second position. At the end of the production, the movable member 34 is returned from the first position or the second position to the initial position. “Turning only” is a movable object notice effect pattern corresponding to performing only the turning operation in which the movable member 34 operates, such as vibrating the movable member 34 in the initial position. Such a turning operation is also performed before the movable member 34 is operated in the “first mode” or the “second mode”.

  Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the moving object notice effect, the movable object notice effect is determined by referring to the movable object notice effect determination table 165 set in the process of step S642. And the movable object notice pattern is determined (step S643). Thereafter, the movable object notice effect setting process ends.

  In this embodiment, in the case of any one of the continuous performance patterns A1-3, A2-3, A3-3, and B3-3, the movable object notification effect is not executed. In the case of a variation pattern in which a continuous effect is executed, the movable object notice effect is executed at the last repetition of the continuous effect. In the continuous production patterns A1-3, A2-3, A3-3, and B3-3, the production time at the last repetition of the continuous production is shortened (see FIG. 15A). As described above, when the movable object notice effect is executed, it is necessary to return the movable member 34 to the initial position at the end of the effect. In order to prevent the operation from being out of time, the moving object notice effect is not executed in the case of a continuous effect pattern in which the effect time at the last repetition of the continuous effect is short. Thereby, it can prevent that an effect becomes troublesome and can prevent the fall of interest. Even if the production time at the last repetition of the continuous production is short, the movable object notice production other than the movable object notice production pattern in which the operation amount is large and the production time is insufficient as in the “second mode” is executed. You may make it do.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 35, after executing the notice effect setting process in step S553, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the change pattern specified by the change pattern command is a change pattern with super reach. (Step S554A). If it is determined that the variation pattern is accompanied by super reach, the development effect determination process is executed (step S554B).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the development effect determination process executed in step S554B. In the development effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state (step S921). If the gaming state is not a probable change state (N in Step S921), it is determined whether or not it is a high base state (Step S922).

  On the side of the effect control board 80, when a display result specifying command is received, a flag for specifying a gaming state is turned on or off. The effect control CPU 101 identifies the gaming state by checking this flag. For example, when a display result specifying command for specifying the first to fourth probable big hits or suddenly promising big hits is received, when the display control specific change flag is turned on and a normal big hit is received. Then, the production control probability variation flag is turned off. Also, when a display result specifying command for specifying normal big hit, first to fourth probability variation big hit, or sudden probability variation big hit is received, the high base flag for effect control is turned on, and the end timing of the short-time state (for example, normal big hit) The high base flag is turned off when 100 variable displays have been completed.

  If it is not in the high base state (N in Step S922), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern command, the number of repetitions of the continuous effect in the specified variation pattern (the number of notification effects repeatedly executed in the continuous effect) Is specified (step S924).

  If the current gaming state is a probable change state (Y in step S921), if it is in a high base state (Y in step S922), or if the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is 3 or more (Y in step S925) Then, it is determined that the development effect is not executed (step S926), and the development effect determination process is terminated.

  The development effect is an effect of encouraging the player's expectation by making it appear that it has evolved from normal reach to super reach. However, since the ratio of normal reach is low when the number of repetitions of the continuous production is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (in this embodiment, when the number of repetitions of the continuous production is 3, ), The production effect of the development effect that appears to have evolved from normal reach to super reach is reduced. That is, if it is known that super-reach is achieved by continuous production, if the development production is executed, useless production is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the development effect is not executed when the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is a predetermined number or more. Thereby, useless production can be omitted and the interest of the game is improved.

  Similarly, when the gaming state is a probability change state or a high base state, the occurrence rate of normal reach is low. Thus, when the occurrence rate of normal reach is low, the effect of the development effect is low. In other words, if the development effect is executed when the occurrence rate of normal reach is low, most of the normal reach will be developed into super reach, so the player can predict the effect. End up. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the occurrence rate of normal reach is low, the development effect is not executed. Thereby, useless production can be omitted and the interest of the game is improved.

  If the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is less than 3 (N in step S925), the developed effect determination table 303 for determining whether or not to execute the developed effect shown in FIG. 44 is set (step S927). The development effect determination table 303 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The development effect determination table 303 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the development effect and a development effect pattern (development effect pattern) based on the random value SR9 for development effect determination. . The development effect determination table 303 executes the development effect depending on whether the reach production of the super reach is the reach production α or the reach production β, and whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios are different and the development effect patterns are determined differently.

  In the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 44, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined to execute the development effect is higher than when the variable display result is “losing”. Yes. With this setting, when the gaming state is the normal state or when the number of times of continuous production is less than a predetermined number, the player can feel the expectation of the player by the development effect, and the player becomes the development effect. Attract attention and improve the fun of the game.

  44, when the variable display result is “losing” in the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 44, the temporary stop was made with “separated eyes” (losing symbol that is not also a reach symbol (also referred to as a dohazure symbol)). "Development after temporary stop-1" (the pattern of development that develops into super reach later on) It is easy to be determined as the development effect pattern of the development effect that develops to reach). On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is easier to determine the development effect pattern of “separate eyes” than “development after temporary stop—1”. With such a setting, the reliability that becomes “big hit” when the development effect of “Ballet eyes” is executed may be higher than that when the development effect of “Development after temporary stop-1” is executed. it can. Thereby, since the ratio which becomes a specific display result changes with the production | presentation aspects of a development effect, a player comes to pay more attention to a development effect and the interest of a game improves.

  In the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 44, the determination ratio of the development effect pattern is different between the case of the reach effect α and the case of the reach effect β. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to which development effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Subsequent to the process of step S927, numerical data indicating the random value SR9 for determining the developed effect is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S928). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR9 extracted in step S928, by referring to the development effect determination table 303 set in step S927, the reach effect is determined and the variable display result is “lost”. The presence / absence of the development effect and the development effect pattern are determined according to whether it is “big hit” or not (step S929).

  At this time, if it is determined that there is no development effect (N in step S930), the development effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S930 that there is a development effect (Y in step S930), a temporary stop pattern corresponding to the reach symbol is determined (step S931). In the process of step S931, which is the development effect pattern determined in step S929, and the determined reach symbols (the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R). ) Is determined as a temporary stop symbol in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C. If it is the development effect pattern of “development after provisional stop-1”, the effect design obtained by decrementing the determined reach design becomes the temporary stop design in the effect design display area 9C. Further, in the case of the “Rakugo” development effect pattern, the random number SR10 extracted is compared with the determination value using the rose determination table shown in FIG. After the process of step S931, the development effect determination process is terminated.

  Following the notice effect setting process in step S553 of FIG. 35, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S555). At this time, the production control CPU 101 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, and sets it as a usage pattern. Also, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns is selected and set as a use pattern corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of various effects and the effect pattern determined in the notice effect setting process in step S553. Here, in the effect control pattern when executing the continuous effect and other effects (such as the pre-reading notice effect and the movable object notice effect), the other effects are not executed when the suggestion effect in the continuous effect is executed. It is assumed that display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and the like are set in According to such a configuration, since other effects are not executed during the execution of the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect can be further paid attention.

  Following the process of step S555, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit is set in accordance with the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command (step S556). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the production | presentation symbol in the production | presentation display apparatus 9 is performed (step S557). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S555 is transmitted to the VDP 109 of the display control unit 123, etc. It is only necessary to start the variation of the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” provided on the display screen 9. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation processing (step S558), and the effect symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the effect symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 101 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1 subtraction) (step S562) and then effects the effect control process timer value after the update effect control. Compared with the effect control process timer determination value indicated by the pattern, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the timer determination values (step S563). If it does not match any of the timer determination values (step S563; No), the effect symbol changing process is terminated.

  If the timer determination value matches with the timer determination value in step S563 (step S563; Yes), the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, etc.) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The lamp control data, a part or all of the operation detection control data) or the end code is read (step S564). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in the process of step S563 match the effect control process timer value, the plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other and stored. The effect control execution data may be read out in the process of step S564. In step S564, it is determined whether an end code has been read (step S565). At this time, if it is determined that the code is not an end code (step S565; No), after performing the effect operation control according to the effect control execution data read in step S564 (step S566), the effect symbol variation End the middle process.

  For example, in the production operation control by the process of step S566, the display control command specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP 109 or the like, and the command corresponding to the sound number data specified by the audio control data is sent to the audio output board 70. Among them, a part or all of them are performed sequentially or in parallel (independently if only one operation is performed) out of transmitting to the lamp driver board 35 and outputting a signal specified by the lamp control data. It's fine. In the effect operation control by the process of step S566, it is determined whether or not it is an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation action of the player or the like on the operation unit based on the operation detection control data read in step S564. judge. At this time, if it is the operation valid period, it is determined based on the detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31 whether or not the operation of the player or the like with respect to the operation unit has been detected. And when operation with respect to an operation part is not detected but an operation valid period is complete | finished, presentation operation control according to operation detection control data is complete | finished. On the other hand, when an operation on the operation unit is detected within the operation valid period, for example, a response to the operation on the operation unit is made by changing to the effect control pattern specified by the operation detection control data. Then, control or setting for changing the rendering operation may be performed.

  By the process of step S566, variable display of the effect symbols and various effects (including continuous effects and development effects) during the variable display are executed.

  If it is determined in step S565 that it is an end code (step S565; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the production control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S567). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the effect symbol change end process (step S568), the effect symbol changing process is ended.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect symbol variation end process executed in step S163 of FIG. In the effect symbol variation end process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 101 first displays the determined effect symbol, which is the final stop symbol, as a complete stop display and is derived and displayed (step S571). When the effect symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas until the effect symbol stop command is received. What is necessary is just to carry out a temporary stop display so that the fluctuation fluctuation display of an effect design may be performed, for example in 9L, 9C, 9R.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S571, for example, by determining whether or not a hit start designation command has been received, or by reading the EXT data of the hit start designation command when received, the special figure display result is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not (step S578). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S578; Yes), the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit control production processing. (Step S579), the effect symbol variation end processing is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S578 that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S578; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S580). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S580; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the small hit control. (Step S581), the effect symbol variation end processing is terminated. When it is determined in step S580 that the special figure display result is not “small hit” (step S580; No), the value of the effect process flag is initialized to “0” (step S582), and the effect symbol variation ends. End time processing.

  Subsequently, a display operation example of a continuous effect will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous display operation.

  Here, in the process of step S239 in FIG. 27, the special figure display result (variable display result) is determined to be “big hit”, in the process of step S243, the big hit type is determined to be “probable change”, and in step S272 of FIG. In the above process, it is assumed that the variation pattern PB4-2 corresponding to repeating the continuous effect twice is determined. Then, it is assumed that the continuous effect type is determined to be “pseudo-continuous” in the process of step S843 in FIG. 39 and the continuous effect pattern A2-1 is determined in the process of step S845. Also, in step S847B in FIG. 39, it is determined that the notice effect is repeatedly executed after the suggestion effect is executed. Furthermore, in the process of step S823 of FIG. 40, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the jackpot confirmation notification effect. Then, it is assumed that an effect control pattern corresponding to the determination content is determined in the process of step S555 of FIG.

  In this case, the effect display CPU 101 executes the effect symbol changing process in step S162 of FIG. 34 based on the effect control pattern corresponding to the determined content, thereby producing an effect display device as shown in FIG. At 9, the effect design changes. Then, in response to the determination of the continuous effect pattern A2-1, as shown in FIGS. 48B and 48C, the notice effect of the step-up operation up to the second stage is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 48C, a notice display effect of character display in which one character image (sun image) is displayed is executed.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 48D and 48E, the pseudo consecutive chance GC7 (“7” “8” “8”) is temporarily stopped and displayed. The effects that temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive chances as shown in FIGS. 48D and 48E are suggested effects that suggest that the notice effect is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, the temporary stop-displayed effect symbol is changed again, and the notice effect is restarted as shown in FIG. At the time of the first repetition of the pseudo-ream, the step-up operation up to the second stage is notified as shown in FIGS. 48 (F) and 48 (G) in response to being determined as the continuous performance pattern A2-1. Production is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 48G, a notice display effect of character display in which two character images (a sun image and a car image) are displayed is executed.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (G) and 48 (H), the pseudo consecutive chance GC7 (“7”, “8”, “8”) is temporarily stopped and displayed. The effects that temporarily stop the pseudo consecutive chances as shown in FIGS. 48G and 48H are suggested effects that suggest that the notice effect is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, the temporarily stopped display effect symbol is changed again, and the notice effect is restarted as shown in FIG. At the time of the second repetition of the quasi-continuation, corresponding to the determination of the continuous performance pattern A2-1, as shown in FIGS. 48 (J) and 48 (K), the advance notice of the step-up operation up to the third stage is given. Production is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 48J, a notice display effect of character display in which two character images (sun image and car image) are displayed is executed.

  Thus, after changing the effect symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, two or more effect symbol display areas (for example, “left” and The notice effect is repeatedly executed before the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (such as before reaching the reach state) in the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9R, etc.).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 48L, the movable member 34 is operated in the “second mode”, the frame LED 28 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode, and the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 27 at the maximum volume. The jackpot confirmation notification effect is output. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48 (L), the effect design showing the number “7” is stopped in the “right” effect design display area 9R, and the reach state is reached. After that, the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, and the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in addition to the step-up action and the character display notice effect that are repeatedly executed, the special notice effect that is executed only once during the change can be executed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes troublesome and can perform multiple types of effects, preventing the fall of interest.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 48, it is determined in step S <b> 847 </ b> B in FIG. 39 that it is determined that the repeated notice effect is to be executed after execution of the suggested effect. 48, (G) and (H) are executed to reach without performing the notice effects of FIGS. 48 (I) to (L) after execution of the suggestive effects of FIGS. In this way, even after the suggestion effect is executed, there are a case where the notice effect is repeatedly executed and a case where the notice effect is not repeatedly executed. Can be improved.

  Next, an example of a display operation for a notice series will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of the display operation of the notice series.

  Here, it is assumed that the continuous effect type is determined to be “notice series” in the process of step S843 in FIG. 39 and the continuous effect pattern A2-1 is determined in the process of step S845. The other determination contents are the same as in the example of FIG.

  In this case, the effect display CPU 101 performs the effect symbol changing process in step S162 of FIG. 34 based on the effect control pattern corresponding to the determined content, thereby producing an effect display device as shown in FIG. At 9, the effect design changes. Then, in response to the determination of the continuous effect pattern A2-1, as shown in FIGS. 49B and 49C, the notice effect of the step-up operation up to the second stage is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49C, a notice display effect of character display in which one character image (sun image) is displayed is executed.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 49D, the effect display device 9 is blacked out and an image that cracks the screen is displayed. At this time, for example, a sound effect “valine” is output from the speaker 27. In this example, the effect shown in FIG. 49D is a suggestion effect that suggests that the notice effect is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49 (E), the notice effect is resumed. At the time of the first repetition of the notice series, in response to the determination of the continuous production pattern A2-1, as shown in FIGS. 49E and 49F, the advance notice of the step-up operation up to the second stage is performed. Production is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49F, a notice display effect of character display in which two character images (sun image and car image) are displayed is executed.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 49G, the effect display device 9 is blacked out again, and an image that cracks the screen is displayed. Also at this time, for example, a sound effect of “Balien” is output from the speaker 27. The effect shown in FIG. 49G is also a suggestion effect that suggests that the notice effect is repeatedly executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 49 (H), the notice effect is resumed. At the time of the second repetition of the notice series, the steps up to the third stage are performed in accordance with the determination of the continuous production pattern A2-1 as shown in FIGS. 49 (H), (I), and (J). The notice effect of the up motion is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49I, a character display notice effect is displayed in which two character images (a sun image and a car image) are displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (K), the movable member 34 is operated in the “second mode”, the frame LED 28 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode, and the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 27 at the maximum volume. The jackpot confirmation notification effect is output. After this, as shown in FIG. 49 (L), the effect symbols indicating “7” in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R stop and reach a reach state. The reach effect of the corresponding normal reach is executed, and then the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, and the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 49, it is determined that in step S847B in FIG. 39 it is determined that the repeated notice effect is to be executed after execution of the suggested effect, but it is determined that the repeated notice effect is not to be executed after the execution of the suggested effect. 49, after the execution of the suggestion effect in FIG. 49 (G), the advancement to the reach is performed without executing the notice effects in FIGS. 49 (H) to (L). In this way, even after the suggestion effect is executed, there are a case where the notice effect is repeatedly executed and a case where the notice effect is not repeatedly executed. Can be improved.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example of a suggestion effect mode in the case of a notice series. In the suggested effect mode A shown in FIG. 50A, the crack of the screen of the effect display device 9 is bent (bent), whereas in the suggested effect mode B shown in FIG. The crack of the screen of the device 9 is linear. As described above, the suggestion effect mode determination table is such that the ratio (the reliability with which the notice effect is repeated) of the suggestion effect mode B is higher than that of the suggestion effect mode A after the execution of the suggestion effect. In FIG. 17, a determination value for each suggestive effect mode is assigned.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the suggestion effect mode. The suggestive effect mode is not limited to an effect that only cracks the screen as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, but as shown in FIG. 51, a two-stage effect that causes the screen to crack after the character appears. (2 action effects) may be executed. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (1), the character appears from the right in the first stage effect, and as shown in FIG. 51 (2), the character appears from the left in the first stage effect. The suggestion effect mode shown in FIG. 51 (1) may be set as the suggestion effect mode A, and the suggestion effect mode shown in FIG. 51 (2) may be set as the suggestion effect mode B.

  Furthermore, the mode of the suggestion effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, and may be any effect that allows the player to recognize that the notice effect is repeated. For example, it may be a suggestion effect consisting of two or more stages. In this case, the effect mode may be changed by stepping up from one stage to a plurality of stages as the mode of the suggestion effect. Further, the suggestion effect may be an effect of turning on / off the lamp / LED in a specific pattern only for the sound output from the speaker 27. Further, the suggestion effect may be an effect that only moves the movable object 34. Furthermore, it may be an effect that is executed by appropriately combining effects using these effect devices (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.).

  Next, a display operation example of the sliding pseudo-series (also referred to as a sliding series) will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example of the sliding pseudo-ream.

  Here, it is assumed that the continuous effect type is determined to be “slip pseudo-ream” in the process of step S843 in FIG. 39 and the continuous effect pattern A2-1 is determined in the process of step S845. The other determination contents are the same as in the example of FIG.

  In this case, the effect display CPU 101 performs the effect symbol changing process in step S162 of FIG. 34 based on the effect control pattern corresponding to the above-described determination content, thereby producing an effect display device as shown in FIG. At 9, the effect design changes. Then, in response to the determination of the continuous effect pattern A2-1, as shown in FIGS. 52B and 52C, the notice effect of the step-up operation up to the second stage is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 52C, a notice display effect of character display in which one character image (sun image) is displayed is executed.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), the effect symbol indicating the number “7” stops in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, and as shown in FIG. 52 (E), “right” The effect symbol indicating the English letter “A” stops in the effect symbol display area 9R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (F), the effect design indicating the English letter “A” slips and the variation is resumed, and the notice effect is resumed. The effects shown in FIGS. 52E and 52F are suggestive effects that suggest that the notice effect is repeatedly executed. At the time of the first repetition of the slip pseudo-ream, corresponding to the determination of the continuous performance pattern A2-1, as shown in FIGS. 52 (F) and 52 (G), the step-up operation up to the second stage is performed. A notice effect is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 52 (G), a notice display effect of character display in which two character images (a sun image and a car image) are displayed is executed.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (H), the effect symbol indicating the English letter “B” is stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (I), the effect design indicating the English letter “B” slips and the variation is resumed, and the notice effect is resumed. The effects shown in FIGS. 52 (H) and 52 (I) are also suggested effects suggesting that the notice effect is repeatedly executed. At the second repetition of this slip pseudo-ream, corresponding to the determination of the continuous performance pattern A2-1, as shown in FIGS. 52 (I), (J), and (K), up to the third stage. A notice effect of the step-up operation is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 52 (J), a notice display effect of character display in which two character images (a sun image and a car image) are displayed is executed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 52 (L), the movable member 34 is operated in the “second mode”, the frame LED 28 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode, and the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 27 at the maximum volume. The jackpot confirmation notification effect is output. In addition, as shown in FIG. 52 (L), the effect design showing the number “7” is stopped in the “right” effect design display area 9R to reach the reach state, and the reach effect of the normal reach corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. After that, the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, and the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, it is determined that the preliminary notice effect is to be executed after the suggestion effect is executed in step S847B of FIG. 39, but it is determined that the repeat notice effect is not executed after the suggestion effect is executed. 52 (G) and (H), after the execution of the suggestion effect, the development is reached without executing the notice effects of FIGS. 52 (I) to 52 (L). In this way, even after the suggestion effect is executed, there are a case where the notice effect is repeatedly executed and a case where the notice effect is not repeatedly executed. Can be improved.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a suggestion effect mode in the case of a slip pseudo-ream. In the suggestive effect mode A shown in FIG. 53 (A), after the effect symbols indicating “A”, “B”,... In the “right” effect symbol display area 9R are stopped, the English characters are displayed. In the suggestion effect mode B shown in FIG. 53 (B), the hiragana characters “A”, “I”,... Are displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R. This is an effect in which the hiragana character slips and the fluctuation is resumed after the effect design indicating is stopped. As described above, the suggestion effect mode determination table is such that the ratio (the reliability with which the notice effect is repeated) of the suggestion effect mode B is higher than that of the suggestion effect mode A after the execution of the suggestion effect. In FIG. 17, a determination value for each suggestive effect mode is assigned.

  Furthermore, the mode of the suggestion effect at the time of the slip pseudo-ream is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, but may be an effect that allows the player to recognize that the notice effect is repeated. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 52, every time the suggestion effect is executed, the English letter “A” slips in the first suggestion effect, and the English character “B” slips in the second suggestion effect. However, it is possible to provide an effect that does not step up (or change) every time the suggestion effect is executed. Also, an effect that steps up (or changes) each time the suggestion effect is executed and an effect that does not step up (or change) every time the suggestion effect is executed are provided. The suggestion presentation modes A and B may be used. Further, the stopped symbol is configured to slide in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R, but the stopped symbol slips in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L and the “middle” effect symbol display area 9C. You may do it. Further, the suggestion effect in the case of the slip pseudo-ream may be an effect that is executed by appropriately combining sound output from the speaker 27, lamp / LED on / off control, control of the movable object 34, and the like.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the continuous effect, a step-up operation and a character display notice effect can be executed, and special notice effects such as a jackpot confirmation notification effect, a pre-reading notice effect, a movable object notice effect, etc. Is also feasible.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example of the movable object notice effect. Here, in the process of step S239 in FIG. 27, the special figure display result (variable display result) is determined to be “big hit”, in the process of step S243, the big hit type is determined to be “probable change”, and in step S272 of FIG. In the above process, it is assumed that the variation pattern (for example, PB5-1) that does not execute the continuous effect is determined. Then, it is assumed that the notice effect pattern A0-3 is determined in the process of step S852 in FIG. Furthermore, in the process of step S823 in FIG. 40, it is determined to execute the big hit confirmation notification effect, and in the process of step S643 in FIG. 42A, the movable object notice effect is executed (“second mode”). Shall be determined. Then, it is assumed that an effect control pattern corresponding to the determination content is determined in the process of step S555 of FIG.

  In this case, the effect display CPU 101 performs the effect symbol changing process of step S162 in FIG. 34 based on the effect control pattern corresponding to the determination content, thereby producing an effect display device as shown in FIG. 54 (A). At 9, the effect design changes. Then, in response to the determination of the notice effect pattern A0-3, as shown in FIGS. 54 (B) to (E), the notice effect of the step-up operation up to the third stage is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 54C and 54D, a notice display effect of character display in which two character images (sun images) are displayed is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (F), a movable object notice effect for operating the movable member 34 in the “second mode” is executed, the frame LED 28 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode, and the maximum volume is output from the speaker 27. The big hit confirmation notification effect in which the sound “picone” is output is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (G), the effect symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R to reach the reach state, and the super reach α corresponding to the variation pattern is changed. The reach effect is executed, and thereafter, the effect symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, and the game proceeds to the jackpot gaming state.

  Next, the appearance timing of the suggestive effect will be described. FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing the appearance timing of the character in the suggestion effect. In this embodiment, the suggestion effect at the time of the notice series is an effect in which the screen of the effect display device 9 is blacked out (darkened) for a predetermined period and the screen is cracked, but there are a plurality of timings at which the crack appears on the screen The timing is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55, at the appearance timing A, a crack appears on the screen at the same time as the screen is blacked out. At the appearance timing B, the screen is blacked out until the blackout is erased. A crack appears on the screen near the middle of the period, and at the appearance timing C, a crack appears on the screen in the second half of the period from when the screen is blacked out until the blackout is erased. As described above, the appearance timing is such that the appearance timing A is the lowest in proportion to the execution of the suggestion effect, and the appearance timing C is high in the proportion of the notification effect to be executed after the execution of the suggestion effect. In the determination table (FIG. 18), determination values for each appearance timing are assigned. In the example shown in FIG. 55, the appearance timing of a specific effect (for example, an effect in which a crack appears) in the execution period of the suggestion effect is varied, but the start timing of the suggestion effect (timing for blacking out the screen) May be different. Also, in the case of all series or pseudo-series, a plurality of suggestion effect appearance timings are provided, and the notice effect is executed after execution of the suggestion effect at a different rate according to the appearance timing.

  FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are explanatory diagrams showing development patterns for super reach in the notice series. 56 (super development as it is), the notice effect is executed in FIGS. 56 (1) and (3) (the notice effect is an effect using a character similar to that shown in FIG. 56) (2) and (4), the suggestion effect is executed.

  Here, in step S925 in FIG. 43, the number of repetitions of the notice effect in the continuous effect (in this case, the notice series) is less than three (N in step S925), and therefore the development effect is executed in steps S927 to S929. The presence / absence and the production mode are determined, but if the development production is not executed (no development production) is decided, as shown in FIG. The effect to be executed is executed.

  56 (ballet → super development), the notice effect is executed in FIGS. 56 (11) and (13) (the notice effect is an effect using a character similar to that shown in FIG. 49. (Not shown), the suggestive effect is executed in FIGS. 56 (12) and (14). Here, when the development effect (unevenness) is determined in steps S927 to S929 of FIG. 43, the unevenness (for example, “165”) as the temporary stop symbol is determined in step S931, and FIG. 56 (15). As shown in FIG. 56, after the temporary break display (165) is temporarily stopped and displayed as the development effect, the effect of developing into the super reach effect is executed (FIG. 56 (16)).

  57 (reach losing eyes → super development), the notice effect is executed in FIGS. 57 (21) and (23) (the notice effect is an effect using a character as shown in FIG. (Not shown), the suggestive effect is executed in FIGS. 57 (22) and (24). Here, when the development effect (development after temporary stop-1) is determined in steps S927 to S929 in FIG. 43, reach lose eyes (for example, “767”) as a temporary stop symbol corresponding to the reach symbol in step S931. 57 (26) and (27), after reaching the reach-losing eye “767” as a development effect, a temporary stop display is performed, and then an effect to develop into a super reach effect is executed (FIG. 57 (28)). ).

  Note that, as described above, if the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is three or more, as shown in (super development as it is) in FIG. 56, the super reach effect is executed as it is without executing the development effect.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 56 (3) (13) and 57 (23) are executed after the first suggestion effect is executed in FIGS. 56 (2) (12) and 57 (22). ) Is executed, and after the fourth suggestion effect is executed, for example, in FIGS. 56 (4), (14), and FIG. 57 (24), the advancement effect is shifted to the super reach effect without executing the notification effect. . This is because, for example, the variation pattern PB2-2 is determined as the variation pattern, “notice ream” is determined as the continuous performance type in step S843 of FIG. 39, and “no repeat” is determined in step S847B. A case is shown in which, despite the execution of the fourth suggestion effect, the transition to the “super reach lose” effect is performed without executing the notice effect. The fourth suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined period (for example, a period of 2 seconds for executing the suggestion effect) immediately before the end of the last notice effect (the notice effect after the third suggestion effect). Is done. With such a configuration, the effect control side determines whether the notice effect is executed or not executed after the suggestion effect is executed within the change time determined by the change pattern, regardless of the determination result of repeat presence / absence (with / without repeat). Can be determined.

  FIG. 58 and FIG. 59 are explanatory diagrams showing a development pattern to super reach in the slip pseudo-ream. 58 (super development as it is), a notice effect is executed in FIGS. 58 (31) and 33 (the notice effect is an effect using a character similar to that shown in FIG. 49, so illustration is omitted). The suggestive effect is executed in FIGS. 58 (32) and (34).

  Here, in step S925 in FIG. 43, the number of times of repeating the notice effect in the continuous effect (in this case, all the reams) is less than 3 (N in step S925), so the execution effect is executed in steps S927 to S929. The presence / absence and the production mode are determined, but if it is decided not to execute the development effect (no development effect), as shown in FIG. 58 (35), the development is performed as it is without the development effect. The effect to be executed is executed.

  58 (ballet → super development), the notice effect is executed in FIGS. 58 (41) and 43 (the notice effect is an effect using a character as shown in FIG. (Not shown), the suggestive effect is executed in FIGS. 58 (42) and (44). Here, when the development effect (unevenness) is determined in steps S927 to S929 of FIG. 43, unsettledness (for example, “165”) as a temporary stop symbol is determined in step S931, and FIG. 58 (45). As shown in FIG. 58, after the break-off (outgoing appearance) “165” is temporarily stopped and displayed as the development effect, the effect of developing into the super-reach effect is executed (FIG. 58 (46)).

  59 (reach losing eyes → super development), the notice effect is executed in FIGS. 59 (51) and 53 (the notice effect is an effect using a character similar to that shown in FIG. (Not shown), the suggestive effect is executed in FIGS. 59 (52) and (54). Here, when the development effect (development after temporary stop-1) is determined in steps S927 to S929 in FIG. 43, reach lose eyes (for example, “767”) as a temporary stop symbol corresponding to the reach symbol in step S931. As shown in FIGS. 59 (56) and (57), after reaching the reach-losing eye “767” as a development effect, the effect of developing into a super reach effect is executed (FIG. 59 (58)). ).

  As described above, if the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is three or more, as shown in (super development as it is) in FIG. 58, the super reach effect is executed as it is without executing the development effect.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the first suggestion effect is executed in FIGS. 58 (32) (42) and 59 (52), FIGS. ) Is executed, and after the fourth suggestion effect is executed in FIG. 58 (34) (44) or FIG. 59 (44), for example, the notice effect is not executed and the transition is made to the super reach effect. . This is because, for example, the variation pattern PB2-2 is determined as the variation pattern, “Shoren” is determined as the continuous performance type in step S843 in FIG. 39, and “No repeat” is determined in step S847B. A case is shown in which, despite the execution of the fourth suggestion effect, the transition to the “super reach lose” effect is performed without executing the notice effect. As described above, the fourth suggestion effect is a predetermined period (for example, a two-second period for executing the suggestion effect) immediately before the end of the last notice effect (the notice effect after the third suggestion effect). ) Is executed.

  As explained above, there are cases where the notice effect is repeatedly executed after the suggestion effect is executed and cases where the notice effect is repeatedly executed, and the case where the notice effect is repeated is more reliable than the case where the notice effect is not repeated. Since it is comprised so that a degree may become high, it can be made to pay attention about whether a notice effect is repeatedly performed, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the presence / absence of the notice effect after execution of the suggestion effect is determined using the repetition presence / absence determination table (FIGS. 17A and 17B). A variation pattern for when the announcement effect is executed after the effect is executed and a variation pattern for when the announcement effect is not executed after the execution of the suggestion effect are provided. You may make it determine the case where it performs repeatedly and the case where it does not repeat. That is, the fluctuation patterns PA1-4, PA1-5, PB2-1, PB2-2, PA3-1, PA3-2, PB4-1, PB4-2, PA5-1, PA5-2, PC1 for executing a continuous effect. -3 may be divided into a fluctuation pattern in which the notice effect is executed after the suggestion effect is executed and a change pattern in which the notice effect is not executed after the suggestion effect is executed. According to such a configuration, the variable time can be set according to the case where the repeated notice effect is executed and the case where the repeated notice effect is not executed.

  While suggesting any one of a plurality of types of suggested effects (suggested effects modes A and B), the suggestion is made so that the proportion of the notice effects is different depending on the type of the suggested effects. Since the effect is configured to be executed (see FIG. 17), it is possible to make the player interested in the suggestion effect mode and to further enhance the interest of the game.

  The suggestion effect is executed at any appearance timing among a plurality of predetermined appearance timings, and the suggestion effect is executed so that the rate at which the notice effect is repeated depends on the appearance timing at which the suggestion effect is executed. Since it is comprised (refer FIG. 18, FIG. 55), a player can be interested about the timing which performs a suggestion production, and the interest of a game can be improved further.

  When the announcement effect is not repeated after the suggestion effect is executed and the reach effect is executed, the display result becomes the specific display result at a higher rate than when the reach effect is executed without executing the suggestion effect. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player more interested in whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and to further improve the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, the development effect is an effect that reinforces the player's expectation by making it appear that it has evolved from normal reach to super reach. However, since the ratio of normal reach is low when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is a predetermined number or more (in this embodiment, when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is 3, ), The production effect of the development effect that appears to have evolved from normal reach to super reach is reduced. That is, if the development effect is executed even though it is known that the super-reach is caused by the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the useless effect is executed. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the development effect is not executed when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Thereby, useless production can be omitted and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined to execute the development effect is higher than when the variable display result is “lost”. Yes. With such a setting, when the game state is a normal state or the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is less than a predetermined number, the player can feel the expectation of the player by the development effect, and the player becomes the development effect. Attract attention and improve the fun of the game.

  Further, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303, when the variable display result is “losing”, the pattern of “development after provisional stop—1” is more easily determined than “velocity”. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is easier to determine a “break” pattern than “development after temporary stop—1”. With such a setting, the reliability that becomes “big hit” when the development effect of “Ballet eyes” is executed may be higher than that when the development effect of “Development after temporary stop-1” is executed. it can. Thereby, since the ratio which becomes a specific display result changes with the production | presentation aspect (development production pattern) of a development effect, a player comes to pay more attention to a development effect and the interest of a game improves.

  Further, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303, the determination ratio of the development effect pattern is different between the case of the reach effect α and the case of the reach effect β. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to which development effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, in addition to the step-up operation | movement repeatedly performed and the notice effect of a character display, the special notice effect performed only once during the fluctuation | variation can be performed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes troublesome and can perform multiple types of effects, preventing the fall of interest.

  The pre-reading notice effect that predicts that there is hold data whose variable display result is “big hit” in the hold memory is executed only once, thereby preventing the effect from becoming bothersome and reducing the interest. Can be prevented.

  When the effect is executed, it is determined that it will be a “big hit”, the frame LED 28 is turned on with the strongest light, and the speaker 27 outputs a sound of the maximum volume. By performing it only once, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming bothersome and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Moreover, since the movable object notice effect for operating the movable member 34 is executed only once, it is possible to prevent the movable member 34 from returning to the predetermined initial position and the production from becoming troublesome, and to prevent a decrease in interest. .

  As shown in FIG. 15 (A), even when the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is the same, the effect time at which the notice effect is executed is different (the effect time of each time among the predetermined overall effect times). A plurality of continuous production patterns (with different allocations) are provided. As a result, the unexpected announcement effect that is repeatedly executed appears and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, the reliability with which the variable display result is “big hit” is different for each of the plurality of continuous effect patterns provided in this way. Since the ratio of “big hit” varies depending on the time for which the notice effect is repeated, the player comes to pay attention to the effect time of each time, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA5-1 are continuously produced during the period from the start of the variation to the time t1, and the super reach α is performed during the period from the time t1 to t3 (65 seconds). It is a fluctuation pattern in which the reach production is executed. In the variation patterns PA3-2 and PA5-2, the continuous effect is executed in the period from the start of the variation to the time t2 (> t1), and the super reach β is performed in the period from the time t2 to t4 (85 seconds). It is a variation pattern in which reach production is executed. In the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 133A, it is easier to determine the variation pattern PA3-1 than the variation pattern PA3-2. In the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 133B, it is easier to determine the variation pattern PA5-1 than the variation pattern PA5-2. That is, when the number of times of repeating the continuous effect is equal to or more than the predetermined number (here, 3 times), it is easy to determine the variation pattern having a short effect time of the continuous effect. In the variation pattern in which the effect time of the continuous effect is short, the effect time of the continuous effect per time is shortened. By doing in this way, when there are many repetitions of a continuous production, since the continuous production per time tends to become short, it becomes possible to prevent the production from becoming bothersome and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. If the number of times that the continuous effect is repeated is determined before the variation pattern is determined, and the number of times is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (here, 3 times), it is easy to determine the variation pattern with a short effect time of the continuous effect. You may do it. Even if it does in this way, the effect similar to the above can be acquired.

  In this embodiment, in the case of any one of the continuous performance patterns A1-3, A2-3, A3-3, and B3-3, the movable object notification effect is not executed. In the case of a variation pattern in which a continuous effect is executed, the movable object notice effect is executed at the last repetition of the continuous effect. In the continuous production patterns A1-3, A2-3, A3-3, and B3-3, the production time at the last repetition of the continuous production is shortened (see FIG. 15A). As described above, when the movable object notice effect is executed, it is necessary to return the movable member 34 to the initial position at the end of the effect. In order to prevent the operation from being out of time, the moving object notice effect is not executed in the case of a continuous effect pattern in which the effect time at the last repetition of the continuous effect is short. Thereby, it can prevent that an effect becomes troublesome and can prevent the fall of interest. Even if the production time at the last repetition of the continuous production is short, the movable object notice production other than the movable object notice production pattern in which the operation amount is large and the production time is insufficient as in the “second mode” is executed. You may make it do.

  Also, even if the variable display result is “big hit”, if the big hit type is “surprise”, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to a jackpot type having a low game value in spite of execution of the pre-reading notice effect.

  Also, the lost variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the lost variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D have different assignments of determination values to the variation pattern types CA1-3 and CA2-1. . Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C, the determination value is not assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-2 or the variation pattern type CA2-3, while the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern is determined. A decision value is assigned to the type CA2-2. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA1-1 or the variation pattern type CA2-2, while the variation pattern type CA1-2. Further, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-3. By setting the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D, the variation pattern types CA1- other than the variation pattern types CA2-4 including the variation pattern with super reach are included. The allocation of determined values to 1 to variation pattern types CA1-3 and variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 differs depending on the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories. This makes it possible to adjust the variable display time of the special symbol and the production symbol by varying the determination ratio of the variation pattern according to the total number of reserved memory that is the number of reserved memory of the special figure game. The situation where the operating rate is reduced can be prevented as much as possible. On the other hand, in the winning specific pattern determination process in step S211, it is determined whether or not the random value MR3 is within the range of the common reach reach pattern regardless of the total number of reserved memories. Despite being executed, for example, the total number of reserved memories, which was “2” at the start of the continuous production, has increased to “4” at the time of the variable display of the last production symbol in the continuous production. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reach mode does not become super reach.

  In this embodiment, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc. are set so that other notice effects are not executed when a continuous effect is being executed. Therefore, during the execution of the suggestion effect, other effects are not executed, and the suggestion effect can be further paid attention.

  In the above embodiment, the notification effect is executed after the suggestion effect is executed (however, the notice effect may not be executed. Even if the effect is executed, the notice effect is not executed.), The notice effect may be repeatedly executed without executing the suggestion effect.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various change and application are possible. In the above-described embodiment, the movable object notice effect, the pre-read notice effect, and the jackpot confirmation notice effect can be executed as the special notice effect, but other special notice effects may be executed. Special notice effects are different from notice effects that are repeatedly executed from the start of variable display of effect symbols such as “character notice”, “operation notice”, and “step-up action” until the display result is derived and displayed. It only needs to be executed once. Such a special notice effect may be determined by a process or a random number different from the repeatedly executed notice effect.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that the special notice effect is executed at the last repetition when the continuous effect is executed, but the display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. It may be executed once at an arbitrary timing.

  In addition, in the display operation examples of FIGS. 48 to 52, the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is not displayed, but the number of repetitions may be displayed on the effect display device 9. Further, an effect device that can recognize the number of repetitions at a predetermined position of the game board 2 may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the number of continuous effects is the same, and when the total effect time is the same, a plurality of effect times for executing each notice effect are different. Although the continuous effect pattern is provided, the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 15A is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of repetitions of the continuous effect is the same, each of the effect times for executing the notice effect may be equal and only a plurality of continuous effect patterns having different total effect times may be provided (for example, the continuous effect pattern A3). -1 and B3-1). Also in this case, the ratio of the variable display result to “big hit” may be changed according to the total effect time (effect time per one repetition).

  In the above embodiment, the movable object notice effect is a special notice effect that is executed only once during the change, but the movable object notice effect may be repeatedly executed during the continuous effect. In this case, for example, “swing only” in which the movable member 34 is vibrated at the initial position or “first mode” in which the movable member 34 is operated from the predetermined initial position to the first position (predetermined range). Only the animal notice effect is repeatedly executed during the continuous effect. The “second mode” movable object notice effect that moves the movable member 34 from the predetermined initial position to the first position and further to the second position is a special that is executed only once during the fluctuation. It may be a notice effect. In this way, even if the movable member 34 is repeatedly operated, the amount of operation is small, so that the movable member 34 is prevented from returning to the initial position by the time of the next repetition, thereby preventing the production from becoming annoying. However, the moving object notice effect can be repeatedly executed.

  In the above embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect is executed only when there is pending data whose winning determination result is “15R big hit”, but the big hit type is “surprise” A pre-reading notice effect may be executed in response to the variation pattern with reach. In this case, it is desirable to provide a plurality of presentation modes for the pre-reading notice effect so that the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R big hit” can be grasped due to the difference in the production mode. Further, in such a case or in the above embodiment, the expectation degree that is a probable big hit may be notified by the effect of the pre-reading notice effect.

  In the above embodiment, “probability change” (first specific game state), “non-probability change”, and “surprise change” (second specific game state) are provided as jackpot types, and there is pending data that becomes the first specific game state. In response to the fact that the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in response to the fact that there is pending data in the second specific game state that is less advantageous to the player than the first specific game state. It was supposed not to be. As the second specific gaming state, which is less advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state, the number of times that the big prize opening is opened (the number of round games) is higher than that in the first specific gaming state, as in the above embodiment. There are few, and it is not limited to a thing with little opening time of the big prize opening in a round game. For example, in the second specific gaming state, the opening time of the grand prize opening is the same as that in the first specific gaming state, but the number of times of opening may be small, or the first specific gaming state and the big prize opening are opened. The number of times is the same, but the opening time may be short.

  In the setting example of the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type ranges from “100” to “251”. If the random hit value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is within the range of “50” to “251” when the jackpot type is “probable variation”, at least a variation pattern with super reach is present. The change pattern type CA3-3 included is determined. Therefore, in the process of step S357 of FIG. 24, as shown in FIG. 60A, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, is the variable display result “lost”? Regardless of whether the big hit type is “big hit” other than “surprise”, it may be determined that it is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. Alternatively, the common reach range of the super reach variation pattern may be different between the case where it is determined that the big hit type is other than “surprise” and the case where the special figure display result is determined to be “lost”. . For example, when it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing”, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “230” to “251”, it is determined that it is within the common range of the super reach variation pattern. If it is determined that the jackpot type is other than “surprise”, as shown in FIG. 60B, if the random value MR3 is within the range of “100” to “251”, the super reach variation pattern You may determine with it being in the range of a common range.

  In the above embodiment, regardless of the total number of reserved memories, for example, by determining whether or not the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is “230” or more by the program, the range of the super reach variation pattern common range It was described as determining whether or not it is within. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, either the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C or the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D corresponding to the total number of reserved memories. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is compared with the determination values assigned to the loss variation pattern type determination table (for normal use) 132C and the loss variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) 132D. You may make it determine with it being in the range of a super reach fluctuation pattern common range in the case of the predetermined common determination value.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the movable member 34 operates in the movable object notice effect has been described. However, the movable object that operates in the movable object notice effect is not limited to the movable member 34. For example, shutters 38H and 38L are provided between the effect display device 9 and the game board 2 so that the front of the effect display device 9 can be opened and closed by being driven by shutter motors 36H and 36L and moving in the vertical direction. Thus, the shutters 38H and 38L may be operated in the movable object notice effect.

  In this case, the effect control board 80 has a wiring for outputting a drive signal to the shutter motors 36H and 36L for operating the shutters 38H and 38L, and the front surface of the effect display device 9 in which the shutters 38H and 38L are at a predetermined initial position. Wiring for transmitting detection signals from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L for detecting that the storage position is not covered is connected.

  In this modification, the shutters 38H and 38L are provided with shutter motors 36H and 36L and shutter sensors 37H and 37L, respectively, so that the shutter 38H provided above the effect display device 9 and the effect The shutter 38L provided on the lower side of the display device 9 can be individually operated independently.

  Here, the structure of the shutter unit 500 including the shutters 38H and 38L in the present modification will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 61 is a schematic exploded perspective view showing the structure of the shutter unit. 62A is an enlarged longitudinal sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38H and the left guide member, and FIG. 62B is an enlarged longitudinal sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38L and the left guide member. is there. 63A is an enlarged longitudinal sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38H and the right guide member, and FIG. 63B is an enlarged longitudinal sectional view showing an attachment portion between the shutter 38L and the right guide member. is there. 64A is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the shutters 38H and 38L are located at the retracted position, and FIG. 64B is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the shutters 38H and 38L are located at the front position. is there. In the following description, the lower left side in FIG. 61 is described as the front side of the shutter unit, and the upper right side is described as the back side of the shutter unit.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the shutter unit 500 includes a square frame-shaped frame plate 502 having a horizontally long rectangular opening 503 formed at the center, and a pair of upper and lower portions provided on the front side of the frame plate 502 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Shutters 38H and 38L, shutter motors 36H and 36L provided on the rear side of the frame plate 502 for driving the shutter 38, and detecting that these shutters 38H and 38L are located at the storage position. The shutter sensor 37H is mainly composed of 37L.

  Although not particularly illustrated, the shutter unit 500 is disposed in a standing posture on the front side of the effect display device 9 provided on the back surface of the opening 503. The opening 503 is formed in substantially the same shape as the display surface of the effect display device 9 disposed on the back side of the frame plate 502, and the display surface is formed so as to be visible from the front side of the game board 2 through the opening 503. ing.

  The shutters 38H and 38L are configured by plate-like members having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Mounting pieces 508a and 508b for mounting guide members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, are formed outward from the left and right sides of the shutter 38H, and guide members 521L and 521R described later from the left and right sides of the shutter 38L. The mounting pieces 509a and 509b for mounting are attached outward.

  The shutter 38H is located between a storage position (see FIG. 64A) disposed on the front surface of the upper side portion of the frame plate 502 and a front surface position (see FIG. 64B) disposed above the opening 503. It is provided so as to be movable. The shutter 38L is located between a storage position (see FIG. 64A) disposed on the front surface of the lower side of the frame plate 502 and a front surface position (see FIG. 64B) disposed below the opening 503. It is provided so as to be movable.

  A rod-shaped guide member 520L having a U-shaped cross section is mounted on the left mounting piece 508a of the shutter 38H so as to extend downward, and a bar-shaped guide member 508b having a U-shaped cross section is mounted on the right mounting piece 508b. The guide member 520R is attached so as to extend downward. Further, a bar-shaped guide member 521L having a U-shaped cross section is attached to the left mounting piece 509a of the shutter 38L so as to extend upward, and the right-side mounting piece 509b has a U-shaped cross section. The rod-shaped guide member 521R is attached so as to extend upward.

  A driving rack gear 526H meshing with a driving pinion gear 565H, which will be described later, is formed on the inner surface of the guide member 520R in the longitudinal direction. A rack gear 526L is formed in the longitudinal direction.

  On the back surface of the guide member 520L, a guide groove 523L is formed in the longitudinal direction and is fitted in a longitudinally extending guide piece 522L projecting from the upper left side of the front surface of the frame plate 502, and the guide piece 522L guides the guide member 522L. 520L is guided to move up and down. In addition, a guide groove 523R is formed in the longitudinal direction on the rear surface of the guide member 520R and is fitted to a guide piece 522R extending in the vertical direction provided in parallel to the guide piece 522L on the upper right side of the front surface of the frame plate 502. The guide member 520R is guided to move up and down by the guide piece 522R.

  On the back surface of the guide member 521L, a guide groove 525L is formed in the longitudinal direction and is fitted to a guide piece 524L extending in the vertical direction protruding from the lower left side of the front surface of the frame plate 502, and the guide member 524L guides the guide member 524L. 521L is guided to move up and down. In addition, a guide groove 525R is formed in the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the guide member 521R and is fitted to a vertically extending guide piece 524R that is provided in parallel to the guide piece 524L at the lower part of the front right side of the frame plate 502. The guide member 521R is moved and guided in the vertical direction by the guide piece 524R.

  From the outer surface of the guide member 520L, a detection piece 530H (see FIG. 64) detected by the shutter sensor 37H is formed in the longitudinal direction. The shutter sensor 37H is disposed at a position lower than the lower end of the detected piece 530H in a state where the shutter 38H is located at the storage position, and the shutter sensor 37H is moved by moving the shutter 38H from the storage position toward the front position. The detection piece 530H can be detected.

  Further, a detection piece 530L (see FIG. 64) detected by the shutter sensor 37L is formed from the outer surface of the guide member 521R in the longitudinal direction. The shutter sensor 37L is disposed at a position higher than the upper end of the detected piece 530L in a state where the shutter 38L is positioned at the storage position, and the shutter sensor 37L is moved by moving the shutter 38L from the storage position toward the front position. The detection piece 530L can be detected.

  As described above, in the present modification, the detection pieces 530H and 530L are detected by the shutter sensors 37H and 37L while the shutters 38H and 38L are moving from the storage position toward the front position. In the production control microcomputer 100, when the detection signals of the detected pieces 530H and 530L from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are not input (shutter sensors 37H and 37L; off), the storage positions where the shutters 38H and 38L are the initial positions. Is determined to be located.

  In this modification, while the shutters 38H and 38L are moving from the storage position toward the front surface position, the detection pieces 530H and 530L are detected by the shutter sensors 37H and 37L. When the detection signals of the detected pieces 530H and 530L are input from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L at the position (shutter sensors 37H and 37L; on), the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the shutters 38H and 37L in the storage position. You may make it determine with being located in.

  Next, the mounting structure of the shutter 38H and the left and right guide members 520L and 520R and the shutter 38L and the left and right guide members 521L and 521R will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The guide members 520L and 520R are attached to the shutter 38H in a state where the left and right attachment pieces 508a and 508b of the shutter 38H are disposed on the front surfaces of the attachment pieces 527a and 527b. On the other hand, the guide members 521L and 521R are attached to the shutter 38L in a state in which the left and right attachment pieces 509a and 509b of the shutter 38L are arranged on the back of the attachment pieces 529a and 529b.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), on the left side of the shutter 38H, mounting screws 541a inserted from the back side into mounting holes 540a respectively formed above and below the mounted pieces 527a of the guide member 520L. Is screwed into a screw hole 542a formed in the mounting piece 508a, whereby the guide member 520L is fixed to the left side of the shutter 38H.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (b), on the left side of the shutter 38L, mounting screws 541b inserted from the front side into mounting holes 540b respectively formed on the top and bottom of the mounting pieces 529a of the guide member 521L are attached to the mounting pieces. The guide member 521L is fixed to the left side of the shutter 38L by being screwed into the screw hole 542b formed in 509a.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the right and left attachment pieces 508b of the shutter 38H can be inserted into horizontally long slots 550a formed above and below the attachment pieces 527b of the guide member 520R. The convex portion 551a protrudes toward the back side, and in a state where the convex portion 551a is fitted into the elongated hole 550a from the front side, the screw hole 552a formed in the convex portion 551a is inserted into the elongated hole 550a. The guide member 520R is attached to the right side of the shutter 38H by screwing the attachment bolt 553a from the back side through the larger washer 554a.

  In other words, the attachment bolt 553a is screwed into the screw hole 552a via the washer 554a, so that the attachment piece 508b is attached to the attachment piece 527b so as not to be detached, but the convex portion 551a is a long hole extending in the left-right direction. Since the inside of 550a is slidable, the guide member 520R is attached to the shutter 38H so as to be movable in the left-right direction. In addition, the vertical width dimension of the long hole 550a is the same dimension as the width dimension (outer diameter) L51 of the convex part 551a, and the left-right width dimension L50 is formed larger than the width dimension (outer diameter) L51 of the convex part 551a. Thus (L50> L51), the guide member 520R is attached to the shutter 38H with some play in the left-right direction.

  Further, the height of the convex portion 551a is slightly longer than the depth of the elongated hole 550a, so that even if the mounting bolt 553a is tightly screwed into the threaded hole 552a, the washer 554a remains in the elongated hole. The guide member 520R is attached to the shutter 38H with a little play because the gap is secured between the washer 554a and the elongated hole 550a peripheral portion without being pressed by the peripheral portion 550a. Nevertheless, it is not fixed by the mounting bolt 553a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the right and left attachment pieces 509b of the shutter 38L can be inserted into horizontally long slots 550b formed above and below the attachment pieces 529b of the guide member 521R. The convex portion 551b protrudes toward the front surface side, and the convex portion 551b is fitted into the elongated hole 550b from the rear side, and the screw hole 552b formed in the convex portion 551b is inserted into the elongated hole 550b. The guide member 521R is attached to the right side of the shutter 38L by screwing the attachment bolt 553b from the front side through the larger washer 554b.

  In other words, the mounting bolt 553b is screwed into the screw hole 552b via the washer 554b, so that the mounting piece 509b is attached to the mounted piece 529b in a non-detachable manner, but the convex portion 551b is a long hole extending in the left-right direction. Since the inside of 550b is slidable, the guide member 521R is attached to the shutter 38L so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The vertical dimension of the elongated hole 550b is the same as the width dimension (outer diameter) L53 of the convex portion 551b, and the lateral width dimension L52 is formed larger than the width dimension (outer diameter) L53 of the convex portion 551b. (L52> L53), the guide member 521R is attached to the shutter 38L with some play left and right.

  Further, the height of the convex portion 551b is slightly longer than the depth of the elongated hole 550b, so that even if the mounting bolt 553b is tightly screwed into the threaded hole 552b, the washer 554b is elongated. The guide member 521R is attached to the shutter 38L with some play because the gap is secured between the washer 554b and the elongated hole 550b peripheral portion without being pressed by the peripheral portion 550b. Nevertheless, it is not fixed by the mounting bolt 553b.

  As described above, the guide members 520L and 520R attached to the shutter 38H and the guide members 521L and 521R attached to the shutter 38L are fixedly attached to the shutters 38H and 38L, and the right guide members 520L and 521R are attached to the right side of the shutter 38H. The guide members 520R and 521R are attached to the shutters 38H and 38L so as not to move in the vertical direction but to be slightly movable in the horizontal direction. Therefore, even if an error occurs in the accuracy of molding or assembling of the left and right guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R, this error is caused by the attachment between the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L and the right guide members 520R and 521R. By being absorbed by play, even if twisting or the like occurs when the left and right guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R move in the vertical direction, they are not transmitted to the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L. It is possible to prevent the vertical movement of the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L from occurring.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the shutter 38H with the guide members 520L and 520R attached downward on the left and right sides is arranged on the upper side of the frame plate 502 with the guide members 520L and 520R is arranged. Further, in the state in which the shutter 38L with the guide members 521L and 521R attached upward on the left and right sides is arranged on the lower side of the frame plate 502, the guide members 521L and 521R are arranged below the left and right sides. The guide members 520L and 520R are respectively arranged on the outer sides in the left-right direction with respect to the guide members 521L and 521R.

  In this way, the pair of upper and lower left and right guide members 520L and 520R and guide members 521L and 521R are juxtaposed on the left and right, respectively, so that the front-rear width of the shutter unit 500 is made as thin as possible as compared with the case where it is arranged in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the shutters 38H and 38L can be arranged as close as possible to the display unit of the effect display device 9.

  The guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 503 are configured to fit the guide pieces 522L, 522R, 524L, and 524R facing upward and downward in the respective guide grooves 523L, 523R, 525L, and 525R. Thus, the guide is slidable in the vertical direction. Note that the front surfaces of the guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R are covered with a cover member (not shown), so that they are prevented from being lifted forward.

  The drive rack gears 526H and 526L formed on the guide members 520L and 520R are meshed with the driven pinion gears 565H and 565L disposed on the back surface of the frame plate 502 at the back surface of the frame plate 502, and the driven pinion gears 565H and 565L are , Are provided to be rotatable around rotation shafts 566 and 566 directed in the front-rear direction, and mesh with the driving rack gears 526H and 526L.

  Further, the driven pinion gears 565H and 565L are engaged with the driven gears 567H and 567L on the rear side meshing with the drive gear 36b fixed to the output shaft 36a of the shutter motors 36H and 36L attached to the rear side of the frame plate 502. Are meshed on the back side.

  Therefore, when the shutter motors 36H and 36L are rotated forward, the driven gears 567H and 567L and the driven pinion gears 565H and 565L are rotationally driven, the guide members 520L and 520R meshing with the gears are moved downward, and the guide members 521L and 521R are moved downward. Move upward. That is, the shutters 38H and 38L move from the storage position toward the front position.

  When the shutter motors 36H and 36L are rotated in the reverse direction, the guide members 520L and 520R are moved upward, the shutter 38H is moved upward from the front position toward the storage position, and the guide members 521L and 521R are moved downward. The shutter 38L moves downward from the front surface position toward the storage position.

  That is, since the shutters 38H and 38L are linked to the shutter motors 36H and 36L, which are separate drive sources, via gears, as shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the shutters 38H and 38L, respectively. Can be individually or interlocked from the storage position to the front position or from the front position to the storage position. In this modification, the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L can be moved by separate shutter motors 36H and 36L, respectively, but the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L are moved to the front by a single shutter motor. An interlocking mechanism that interlocks from the position to the storage position or from the storage position to the front surface position may be provided so that both shutters can be interlocked by a single shutter motor.

  As described above, the shutter unit 500 includes the shutters 38H and 38L as the movable objects, the guide members 520L and 521L as the first moving bodies that support the shutters 38H and 38L from the left side, the shutters 38H and the shutters. Guide members 520R and 521R as second moving bodies that support 38L from the right side, guide pieces 522L and 524L and guide grooves 523L and 525L as first guide means for moving and guiding the guide members 520L and 521L, and guide pieces Guide pieces 522R, 524R and guide grooves as second guide means that are provided parallel to 522L, 524L and move and guide the guide members 520R, 521R in the same direction (vertical direction) as the guide direction of the guide members 520L, 521L. 523R, 525R and guide members 520L, 521L, 520R Shutter motors 36H and 36L, driving gear 36b, driven gears 567H and 567L, driven pinion gears 565H and 565L, driving rack gears 526H and 526L, guide members 520L and 521L, and shutter 38H as driving means for driving both 521R in the vertical direction , The mounting screws 541a and 541b, the screw holes 542a and 542b, and the guide members 520R and 521R as well as the shutter 38H and the shutter 38H. 38L and convex portions 551a, 551b, elongated holes 550a, 550b, mounting bolts 553a, 553b, screw holes 552a, 552b as second connecting means for connecting the left and right directions in a lateral direction orthogonal to the up-down direction. Consists of

  The shutters 38H and 38L thus configured are moved and guided by the guide members 520L and 521L and the guide pieces 522R and 524R and the guide grooves 523R and 525R, which are guided by the guide pieces 522L and 524L and the guide grooves 523L and 525L. By being connected to and supported by the guide members 520R and 521R, misalignment and backlash during movement are unlikely to occur. In addition, when an error occurs in the accuracy of molding and assembling of the shutters 38H and 38L, the guide pieces and the guide grooves, and the drive timing with the left and right guide members, the shutters 38H and 38L are in contact with the guide members 520L and 521L. In addition, a large positional shift is prevented and the error is absorbed by the relative movement with respect to the guide members 520R and 521R. Therefore, the shutters 38H and 38L can be moved smoothly without rattling. .

  In the shutter unit 500, the state where the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L are positioned at the storage position is set as the initial position in the drive control by the effect control microcomputer 100. When a projection operation command for the shutters 38H and 38L is output from the effect control microcomputer 100, a drive command in the projection operation direction is transmitted to the shutter motors 36H and 36L, which are stepping motors. As a result, each shutter motor 36H, 36L starts a driving operation of a preset number of steps. As a result, the shutters 38H and 38L perform a protruding operation to move toward the front surface position.

  When the retraction operation command for the shutters 38H and 38L is output from the effect control microcomputer 100, a drive command in the retraction operation direction is transmitted to the shutter motors 36H and 36L that are stepping motors. As a result, each shutter motor 36H, 36L starts a driving operation of a preset number of steps.

  When the shutters 38H and 38L reach the storage positions, the detection signals of the detected pieces 530H and 530L from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are interrupted (shutter sensors 37H and 37L; off), and the shutter motors 36H and 36L are retracted. The driving of the operation is stopped.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the drive control of the shutter 38, for example, the probability that the game state is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. In accordance with the transition of the game state, such as when the transition is made to the probability variation state where the game becomes higher, the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 to the high base state where it is easier to start and win, or the game state transitions to the big hit game state. Alternatively, it may be performed at an appropriate timing, such as when various effects (for example, reach effects or the like) are executed on the display unit of the effect display device 9 or when an operation by the operation unit 30 is performed.

  Further, the upper and lower shutters 38 are not only arranged at either the front position or the storage position while being controlled in each gaming state or when the effect display device 9 is executing the effect, but also the front position and storage. You may perform control which repeats an up-and-down movement between positions.

  The production control microcomputer 100 is configured to check the operation by causing the shutter motors 36H and 36L to perform a predetermined initial operation at a predetermined timing such as when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In this initial operation, for example, the shutter motors 36H and 36L are operated to protrude and retract, and it is confirmed whether the shutter sensors 37H and 37L are normally turned on / off.

  Further, for example, when the shutter control motors 36H and 36L are operated to project, the effect control microcomputer 100 detects the detection signals from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L even if the operation amount of the shutter motors 36H and 36L exceeds a predetermined maximum number of steps. Is not input, a predetermined retry operation is performed, and if a detection signal is still not input from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L, an abnormal state is determined.

  In this retry operation, for example, the shutter motors 36H and 36L are operated by a predetermined number of steps in the retracting operation direction and by a predetermined number of steps in the retracting operation direction that is greater than the protruding operation direction. If it is determined that the state is abnormal, the effect display device 9 may notify the effect by sound, LED, or the like, or the effect display device 9 may provide substantially the same as the shutters 38H and 38L without notification. You may make it produce | present by displaying the moving image which a shutter operate | moves.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on when the upper and lower shutters 38H, 38L are not arranged at the storage position, which is the initial position, and the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a predetermined initial operation on the shutter motors 36H, 36L. As a result, when power is supplied to the shutter sensors 37H and 37L, detection signals are input from the shutter sensors 37H and 37L, and it is determined that an error has occurred because the position of the shutter 38H cannot be specified. There is no possibility that the shutter motors 36H and 36L are driven more than necessary and a load is applied to the shutter motors 36H and 36L and various guide members.

  Further, even if an error occurs in the molding and assembling accuracy of the left and right rack gears 525H and 525LR, the error is absorbed by the play of the mounting portion between the shutters 38H and 38L and the right guide members 520R and 521R. ing. Therefore, when the guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R move through the guide pieces 522L, 522R, 525L, and 525R formed on the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the frame plate 502, the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L are moved. Since no twisting or the like occurs, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lifting operation failure of the shutters 38H and 38L.

  Further, in this modification, one of the guide members 520R and 521R or the shutter 38 is provided in the left-right direction as the relative movement direction and the front-rear direction orthogonal to the up-down direction as the guide direction of the guide members 520R, 521R. Elongate holes 550a and 550b serving as connection openings that open toward the other side, and provided in the other side, extending in the left-right direction as the relative movement direction and in the front-rear direction perpendicular to the up-down direction as the guide direction of the guide members 520R and 521R The second connecting means is composed of the convex portions 551a and 551b as the connecting insertion portions that are provided and inserted into the elongated holes 550a and 550b, and the elongated holes 550a and 550b are inserted into the elongated holes 550a and 550b. By forming the convex portions 551a and 551b as long holes having left and right width dimensions (L50 and L52) that can move in the left and right direction, the long holes 5 Since the axes of 0a and 550b and the convex portions 551a and 551b are directed in the front-rear direction, for example, even if the distance between the shutters 38H and 38L and the guide members 520R and 521R is not forcibly increased, the shutters 38H and 38L Connection and release operations with the guide members 520R and 521R can be easily performed from the front side.

  In addition, a connecting concave portion that opens toward the other is formed on one facing surface of the guide members 520R, 521R or the shutter 38, and the other facing surface is extended and connected in the left-right direction, which is a relative movement direction. The connection convex part which fits into a crevice is formed, and the connection crevice may constitute the 2nd connection means which has the depth size which can move the connection convex part fitted to this connection crevice in the left-right direction, In this case, it is possible to connect the guide members 520R and 521R to the shutter 38 so as to be relatively movable in the left-right direction and not to be relatively movable in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction simply by fitting the connection convex portion to the connection concave portion. it can.

  In this modified example, the right and left right guide members 520R and 521R are attached to the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L with a play that is not movable in the vertical direction and movable in the horizontal direction. However, it may be mounted with play that is movable not only in the left-right direction but also in the up-down direction. By doing so, an error in the up-down direction is caused in the accuracy of molding and assembling of the left and right rack gears 525H and 525L. Even if it occurs, this error can be absorbed by the play of the mounting portion between the shutters 38H and 38L and the right guide members 520R and 521R.

  Further, the right guide members 520R and 521R may be attached to the upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L with a play that is immovable in the horizontal direction and movable in the vertical direction. What is necessary is just to arrange | position 550a, 550b toward the up-down direction.

  In this modification, the elongated holes 550a and 550b are provided on the guide members 520R and 521R side, and the convex portions 551a and 551b that can be inserted into the elongated holes 550a and 550b are provided on the shutters 38H and 38L. The long holes 550a and 550b may be provided on the 38th side, and the convex portions 551a and 551b may be provided on the guide member 520R and 521R side.

  In this modification, only the right guide members 520R and 521R are attached to the shutters 38H and 38L with a play that is not movable in the left-right direction and movable in the up-and-down direction. In contrast, only the left guide members 520L and 521L may be attached with a play that is not movable in the left-right direction and movable in the vertical direction, or the left and right guide members 520L with respect to the shutters 38H and 38L. , 520R, 521L, and 521R may be provided with a play that is immovable in the left-right direction and movable in the up-down direction. In this case, the play of the left and right guide members 520L, 521L, 520R, and 521R with respect to the shutters 38H and 38L, that is, the relative movement allowable amount may be made larger in one of the left and right than the other.

  The upper and lower shutters 38H and 38L are driven mainly according to the effect display by the effect display device 9 controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100. In the case where the shutter is not driven, normally, nothing is displayed on the screen area where the shutters 38H and 38L are arranged on the front side, and the player feels uncomfortable. For example, an effect of driving the shutters 38H and 38L is executed. At this time, by controlling to always display images imitating the shutters 38H and 38L in the rear area of the shutter 38, even if the shutters 38H and 38L are not driven, the same as when the shutters 38H and 38L are driven. Since the production screen can be provided, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Further, in the shutter unit 500 of the modified example, the shutter shutters 38H and 38L are made non-translucent, and an image or the like displayed on the display unit on the back side cannot be viewed through the shutters 38H and 38L, but the shutter 38H , 38L may be formed of a light-transmitting material so that an image displayed on the display unit on the back side can be viewed through the shutters 38H, 38L.

  In the modified shutter unit 500, the guide members 520L, 520R, 521L, and 521R are arranged on the left and right sides of the display unit, respectively, but may be arranged on the front side of the display unit, or It may be arranged on the back side of the effect display device 9.

  Here, a specific example of the movable object notice effect implemented in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present modification controlled as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 65 to 67, the display screen of the effect display device 9 changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), (D).

  FIG. 65 is a display operation example of a movable object notice effect according to a modification. In this modified example, when it is determined in step S643 in FIG. 42A that a “moving only” or “second mode” movable object notice effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 101 responds to the determined content. Based on the effect control pattern thus performed, the effect symbol variation is started in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIGS. 65 (A) and 65 (B) by executing the effect symbol changing process in step S162 of FIG. Is done.

  Then, before executing the movable object notice effect, as shown in FIG. 65C, the position of the start winning memory display area 5H is superimposed on the position that is not hidden by the shutters 38H and 38L (the movable range of the shutters 38H and 38L is superimposed). Change to the position where you do not. In this embodiment, the lower left portion of the effect display device 9 is the position of the normal start winning memory display area 5H, but this is changed to the left and right portions of the effect display device 9. Note that the position to be changed is not limited to this, and any position that does not overlap with the movable range of the shutters 38H and 38L and that can display the number of reserved memories is arbitrary.

  Thereafter, when it is determined that the “moving only” movable object notice effect is to be executed, shutter images are displayed on the upper and lower portions of the effect display device 9 as shown in FIGS. 65 (D1) and (E1). An effect that appears and the shutter image is moved and displayed in the vertical direction is executed.

  When it is determined that the “second mode” movable object notice effect is to be executed, the upper shutter 38H and the lower shutter 38L operate together as shown in FIGS. 65 (D2) and (E2). Thus, an effect that operates (moves) so as to temporarily cover the upper side and the lower side of the display area of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), after the “moving only” movable object notice effect is executed, the shutter images are moved and displayed in opposite directions, respectively, and the “second mode” is allowed. After the animal notice effect is executed, both the shutters 38H and 38L return to the storage position as the initial position, and the display area is released.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the display position of the start winning storage display area 5H is returned to the original position (lower left of the effect display device 9), and the fluctuation is continued.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the shutters 38H and 38L are operated, the stored storage display displayed in the display area (start winning storage display area 5H) of the effect display device 9 is operated, and the lower shutter 38L is operated. In order to prevent the player from losing visibility, the control for changing the position of the start winning memory display area 5H to a position that is not hidden by the shutters 38H and 38L (a position that does not overlap with the movable range of the shutters 38H and 38L) is executed. Is done. In addition, in the case of “moving only” movable object notice effect, even if the shutters 38H and 38L do not actually operate, the position of the start winning memory display area 5H does not overlap the movable range of the shutters 38H and 38L. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the movement of the movable object and reducing the interest of the game. Although not described here, the “first mode” movable object notice effect may be any as long as the shutters 38H and 38L operate in a manner different from the “second aspect” movable object notice effect. For example, it is sufficient if only one of the shutters 38H and 38L operates, or the one in which the operation amount of the shutters 38H and 38L is smaller than that in the “second mode”. Also in this case, control for changing the position of the start winning storage display area 5H to a position that does not overlap with the movable range of the shutters 38H and 38L is executed.

  Note that the moving object notice effect of “swing only” is not limited to the display of the shutter image as shown in FIGS. 65D1 and 65E1, and the shutters 38H and 38L operate for a moment and the initial position is displayed. The shutters 38H and 38L may be expected to return to the storage position.

  In addition, when the movable object notice effect is executed, the position of the start winning memory display area 5H is not changed to a position that does not overlap the movable range of the shutters 38H and 38L, but the position of the start winning memory display area 5H is changed. At the timing, as shown in FIG. 66, the start winning storage display area 5H may be temporarily deleted from the effect display device 9. Also by doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the movement of the movable object and reducing the interest of the game.

  In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H, as shown in FIG. 67, when the movable object notice effect is executed, the display positions of the color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are set as the movable ranges of the shutters 38H and 38L. You may make it change to the position which does not superimpose. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the color symbol display areas 5A and 5B from becoming invisible to the player by operating the shutters 38H and 38L. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the movement of the movable object and reducing the interest of the game. Note that the color symbol display areas 5A and 5B may be temporarily erased from the effect display device 9 when the movable object notice effect is executed.

  The control for changing the positions of the start winning memory display area 5H and the color symbol display areas 5A and 5B, and the control for temporarily erasing the start winning memory display area 5H and the color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are the moving object advance notice effect. The same timing may be performed even when the process is not executed (in the case where “no execution” is determined in step S643 in FIG. 42A). Alternatively, such control may be executed at a predetermined rate when the movable object notice effect is not executed. By doing so, control for changing the positions of the start winning memory display area 5H and the color symbol display areas 5A and 5B, and control for temporarily erasing the start winning memory display area 5H and the color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are performed. By being executed, it becomes possible for the player to easily predict that the movable object notice effect will be executed, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced.

  It should be noted that the shutters 38H and 38L operate not only when the movable object notice effect is executed, but may perform a predetermined operation during another effect (continuous effect or reach effect). Even in this case, control for changing the positions of the start winning memory display area 5H and the color symbol display areas 5A and 5B to a position not overlapping the movable range of the shutters 38H and 38L, the start winning memory display area 5H and the color symbol display area 5A. 5B is temporarily erased.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b has been described. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with one special symbol display is also described in this embodiment. The invention can be applied.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 mounted on the effect control board 80 performs the final stop symbol determination process in step S551 in FIG. 35, the variable display effect setting process in step S552, the notice effect setting process in step S553, and the like. It has been described that the control contents of various performance operations are determined by executing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control contents of various rendering operations are shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the rendering operations. It may be.

  As an example, a display control board is provided between the effect control board 80 and the effect display device 9. The display control board only needs to be equipped with a display control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a random number circuit, and an I / O. In this case, since the display control CPU mounted on the display control board executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 9, it is mounted on the effect control board 80 in the above embodiment. The display control unit 123 may be mounted on the display control board. In the display control board, for example, when the display control CPU executes a program read from the ROM, processing for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image on the effect display device 9 is executed. At this time, the display control CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, the display control CPU writes various variation data to the RAM and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU stores the various data in the RAM. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the display control board via the I / O display control CPU, I / O for the display controlling CPU A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board via the display is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU performs steps S551 to S554B shown in FIG. 35 based on, for example, a display control command from the effect control board 80 or an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 via the effect control board 80. Any of the processes may be executed. The display control CPU only needs to execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 101 in the above embodiment. Further, the audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 may be connected to the effect control board 80 by wiring for transmitting a control command from the effect control board 80. In this case, in the effect control board 80, for example, the effect control CPU 101 may execute a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation.

  Alternatively, the functions of the audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 are provided in the audio control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 80, and independent control to be the audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, a display control board as described above is provided between the effect control board 80 and the effect display device 9, and the effect control CPU 101 responds to the effect control pattern determined in step S555 of FIG. The display control command may be transmitted from the effect control board 80 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 2, any one of the processes executed by the production control CPU 101 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the audio output board 70 and the microcomputer mounted on the lamp driver board 35 is selected. May be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the production operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the production display device 9 and the control content of the audio output operation in the speaker 27 are determined. On which control board each process for determining the control content of various rendering operations, such as a process for determining and a process for determining the control content of the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the frame LED 28, is executed. Any combination may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type in accordance with the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value, as a “suddenly short” or “sudden normal” jackpot. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that the table data allocated to a classification may be included. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition to the above, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and the various display operations including the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  The present application also discloses the following gaming machines.

  The special notice effect executing means executes the special notice effect when the notice effect executing means executes the notice effect for the predetermined number of times (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the last repetition of the continuous effect in the process of step S162). (A game machine that is sometimes executed with a special notice effect). According to such a configuration, the special notice effect is easy to understand and the interest of the game is improved.

  The variable display means passes a game medium (for example, a game ball) through a start area (for example, a first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A or a second starting winning port formed by the normal variable ball device 6B). After the variable display execution condition is satisfied, the variable information display is started based on the start condition that allows the variable display to start (for example, the CPU 103 determines Yes in step S231). On the basis of the fact that the execution condition is satisfied, the storage means for storing the right to perform variable display up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, production) Control hold storage unit 195, etc.), and a predetermined hold display area in the variable display means, a predetermined hold specific information is displayed so that the number of rights stored in the hold storage means can be specified Display control means (for example, in the start winning memory display area 5H, a portion for performing a hold memory display for specifying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner), and providing a notice effect or a special notice At least one of the effects operates from a non-overlapping position where a movable member (for example, shutter 38H, 38L) is not superimposed on the reserved display area of the variable display means to a superimposed position where it is superimposed on at least a part of the reserved display area of the variable display means. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 51 (D2) and 51 (E2), the shutter 38H and 38L are operated), and the hold display control means is configured to display a predetermined hold display area when the movable member is operated. Regardless of whether or not hold specific information is displayed, the predetermined hold display area is changed to a position that does not overlap with the movable member at the overlap position (example As shown in situ view 51 (C), to move the start winning storage display area 5H). Further, the hold display control means erases the predetermined hold display area from the variable display means regardless of whether or not hold specific information is displayed in the predetermined hold display area when the movable member operates (for example, As shown in FIG. 52 (C), the start winning memory display area 5H is erased). According to such a configuration, when there is a possibility that at least a part of the hold display area may overlap when the movable object moves, the hold display area is changed to a position that does not overlap with the moveable object at the overlap position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling mistrusted without erroneously recognizing the number of rights stored on hold.

  When the movable member is operated, before the operation, a movable suggestion effect executing means (for example, a diagram) that executes a movable suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the movable member operates at a predetermined ratio even when the movable member does not operate. 51 (D1) and (E1) are further provided), and the hold display control means is independent of whether or not the movable member is operated when the movable suggestion effect executing means executes the movable suggestion effect. The predetermined hold display area is changed to a position that does not overlap with the movable member at the overlapping position (for example, as shown in FIG. 51C, the start winning storage display area 5H is moved). Further, the hold display control means erases a predetermined hold display area from the variable display means regardless of whether or not the movable member operates when the move suggestion effect execution means executes the move suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 52). As shown in (C), the start winning memory display area 5H is erased). According to such a configuration, when the movable suggestion effect is executed, the position of the hold display area is uniformly changed regardless of whether the movable effect is executed after the move suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the movement of the movable object according to the display state of the information and reducing the interest of the game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Gaming machine frame 8a, 8b Special symbol display 9 Production display device 31 Main board 80 Production control board 32a Gate switch 13a, 14a Start-up switch 560 Game control microcomputer 56 CPU
100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU

Claims (1)

The variable display means comprising a plurality of variable display sections for deriving and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of the identification information, and the identification derived and displayed on the variable display means A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of the information becomes a specific display result,
Pre-decision means for deciding whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Reach for deriving and displaying the display result of the identification information on the variable display means after executing the reach effect after the identification information has reached the reach state in the variable display means based on the determination result of the prior determination means Production execution means;
Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the notice effect execution for repeatedly executing the notice effect a predetermined number of times from when the variable display of the identification information is started until the reach effect is executed by the reach effect execution means. Means,
Suggesting effect executing means for executing the suggesting effect before repeatedly executing the notice effect ,
The reach production execution means can execute at least a first reach production and a second reach production,
After executing the first reach production, temporarily stopping the identification information with a non-specific display result that is not the specific display result in the variable display means, and restarting the variable display of the identification information of some of the variable display units , A first development effect for executing the second reach effect, or a second development for executing the second reach effect without temporarily stopping the identification information in a non-specific display result that is not the specific display result in the variable display means. It further includes development effect execution means for executing the effect,
The development effect executing means executes the second development effect without executing the first development effect when the notice effect is executed a specific number of times or more by the notice effect execution means.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes,
The notice effect execution means includes:
When repeating the notice effect, after executing the special effect, restart the notice effect,
When the suggestion effect is executed by one effect mode of the plurality of types of effect modes, and when the suggestion effect is executed by another effect mode different from the one effect mode, the ratio is different. Repeated the announcement effect,
Special notice effect execution means for executing the special notice effect different from the notice effect only once until the reach effect is executed by the reach effect execution means after the variable display of the identification information is started . A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images